Sony GVD-1000 User Manual

3-072-571-12(1)
Digital
Video Cassette
Recorder
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,
and retain it for future reference.
cpy cyaa
epe cyaae aapaa ae pe,
ayca, ae pyc cxpae e
aex cpa.
Owners Record
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record
the serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these
numbers whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this
product.
Model No. GVSerial No.
Model No. AC
Serial No.
GV-D1000/D1000E
2002 Sony Corporation
English
GV-D1000
Welcome!
Congratulations on your purchase of this VCR.

Your VCR is loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will
soon be producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do
not expose the unit to rain or
moisture.
For customers in the U.S.A.

If you have any questions about this product, you may
call :
Sony Customer Information Center
1-800-222-SONY (7669)
The number below is for the FCC related matters only.
Regulatory Information
Declaration of Conformity
This symbol is intended to alert

the user to the presence of
uninsulated dangerous voltage
within the products enclosure
that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
This symbol is intended to alert
the user to the presence of
important operating and
maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
For customers in the U.S.A. and

CANADA
CAUTION
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
Trade Name:
SONY
Model No.:
GV-D1000
Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc.
Address:
680 Kinderkmark Road,
Oradell, NJ 07649 U.S.A
Telephone No.:
201-930-6972
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions.: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not
expressly approved in this manual could void your
authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
The supplied interface cable must be used with
the equipment in order to comply with the limits
for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part
15 of FCC Rules.
English
GV-D1000E
GV-D1000E
Welcome!
opo aoa!
Congratulations on your purchase of this VCR.

Your VCR is loaded with advanced features, but
at the same time it is very easy to use. You will
soon be producing home video that you can
enjoy for years to come.
pae Bac c ppeee

eaa.
Bea cae
ycepeca y, e
pe e e e ca. Bcpe B
yee caa ceee eppa,
p ee acaac ceye
.
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose
the unit to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the
cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.
NOTICE ON THE SUPPLIED AC POWER

ADAPTOR FOR CUSTOMERS IN THE
UNITED KINGDOM
A moulded plug complying with BS1363 is fitted
to this equipment for your safety and
convenience.
Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to
be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by
ASTA or BSI to BS1362 (i.e., marked with
or
mark) must be used.
If the plug supplied with this equipment has
a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the
fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never
use the plug without the fuse cover. If you
should lose the fuse cover, please contact
your nearest Sony service station.
For the customers in Europe

ATTENTION
The electromagnetic fields at the specific
frequencies may influence the picture and sound
of this digital video cassette recorder.
This product has been tested and found to
comply with the Limits set out in the EMC
Directive using a connection cable shorter than 3
meters. (9.8 feet)

.

.

.
epae a peeex
acax y a paee
y, cpe a p
acce ea.

,
3 .

() ,

USB-
.
Notice
If static electricity or electromagnetism causes
data transfer to discontinue midway (fail), restart
the application or disconnect and connect the
USB cable again.
For the customers in Germany

Directive: EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
92/31/EEC
This equipment complies with the EMC
regulations when used under the following
circumstances:
Residential area
Business district
Light-industry district
(This equipment complies with the EMC
standard regulations EN55022 Class B.)
English
Main Features
Inserting moving or still images, and playing them back
Playing back a tape (p. 23)
Recording from the other VCR or TV (p. 32)
Recording an image from a tape as a still image (p. 127)
Recording a picture from a tape as a moving picture (p. 131)
Viewing a still image recorded on Memory Sticks (p. 142)
Viewing a moving picture on Memory Sticks (p. 147)
Capturing images on your computer

Using with an analog video unit and your computer (p. 88)
Viewing images recorded on tapes using the supplied USB cable (Windows users only) (p. 96)
Viewing images recorded on Memory Sticks using the supplied USB cable (p. 150)
Other uses
Functions to give images more impact
Picture effect (p. 36)
Digital effect (p. 38)
Title (p. 44)
Functions to use on recorded tapes
DATA CODE (p. 64)
Tape PB ZOOM (p. 41)
Zero set memory (p. 43)
Title search (p. 56)
Digital program editing (on tapes) (p. 71)
Digital program editing (on Memory Sticks) (p. 135)
HiFi SOUND (p. 27)
Labeling a cassette (p. 52)
Functions to use on recorded Memory Sticks
Memory PB ZOOM (p. 164)
Oce epa
Bcaa x ex pae x cpeee
Bcpeee acce (cp. 23)
ac c py eaa eepa (cp. 32)
ac pae c acce a e pae (cp. 127)
ac pae c acce a pae (cp. 131)
pcp ex pae, acax a Memory Stick (cp. 142)
pcp x pae, acax a Memory Stick (cp. 147)
epec pae a ep
cae c aa eaapayp ep (cp. 88)
pcp pae, acax a acceax, c paae ae USB (
aee Windows) (cp. 96)
pcp pae, acax a Memory Stick, c paae ae USB (cp. 150)
pye epa
y pa pae e paec
e pae (cp. 36)
p e (cp. 38)
Tp (cp. 44)
y, cyee acax acce

DATA CODE (cp. 64)
PB ZOOM acce (cp. 41)
a ye e (cp. 43)
c pa (cp. 56)
p a ppa (a acceax) (cp. 71)
p a ppa (a Memory Stick) (cp. 135)
HiFi SOUND (cp. 27)
Mappa acce (cp. 52)
y, cyee acax Memory Stick

PB ZOOM a (cp. 164)
English
Table of contents
Main Features ............................................... 4
Getting started
Using this manual ...................................... 10
Checking supplied accessories ................. 13
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ........ 14
Connecting to a wall outlet
(wall socket) ................................... 14
Using with a battery pack
(optional) ........................................ 15
Step 2 Setting the date and time ............. 19
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ........................ 22
Basic Operations
Playing back a tape .................................... 23
Viewing the recording on TV ................... 30
Recording from the other VCR or TV ..... 32
Editing
Dubbing a tape ........................................... 67
Dubbing only desired scenes Digital
program editing (on tapes) ................ 71
Using with an analog video unit
and your computer
Signal convert function .................... 88
Inserting a scene from the other VCR
Insert Editing .................................... 90
Audio dubbing ........................................... 93
Viewing images recorded on tapes on
your computer
(Windows user only) .......................... 96
Customizing Your VCR

Changing the menu settings ................... 107
Memory Stick Operations

Advanced Operations
Playing back a tape with
picture effects ....................................... 36
Playing back a tape with
digital effects ........................................ 38
Enlarging images recorded on tapes
Tape PB ZOOM ................................ 41
Quickly locating a scene using the
zero set memory function .................. 43
Superimposing a title ................................ 44
Making your own titles ............................. 49
Labeling a cassette ..................................... 52
Searching the boundaries of recorded
tape by title Title search .................. 56
Searching a recording by date
Date search ........................................ 58
Searching for a photo
Photo search/Photo scan ................ 61
To display the screen indicators
Display function ............................... 64
Using a Memory Stick

introduction ..................................... 118
Recording an image from a tape as a
still image ........................................... 127
Recording a picture from a tape as a
moving picture .................................. 131
Recording edited pictures as a moving
picture Digital program editing
(on Memory Sticks) ....................... 135
Copying still images from a tape
Photo save ....................................... 140
Viewing a still image
Memory photo playback ............... 142
Viewing a moving picture
MPEG movie playback .................. 147
Viewing images recorded on Memory
Sticks on your computer ................ 150
Copying the image recorded on
Memory Sticks to tapes ................ 162
Enlarging still images recorded on
Memory Sticks
Memory PB ZOOM ........................ 164
Playing back images in a continuous

loop SLIDE SHOW ......................... 166
Preventing accidental erasure
Image protection ............................. 168
Deleting images ........................................ 169
Writing a print mark
PRINT MARK ................................. 172
Troubleshooting
Type of trouble and their solutions ....... 174
Self-diagnosis display ............................. 180
Warning indicators and messages ......... 181
Additional Information
Usable cassettes ........................................ 192
About the InfoLITHIUM
battery pack ........................................ 195
About i.LINK ............................................ 197
Using your VCR abroad .......................... 199
Maintenance information and
precautions ......................................... 201
Specifications ............................................ 207
Quick Reference
Identifying the parts and controls ......... 211
Index .......................................................... 219
Oaee
Oce epa .................................. 5
a cyaa
cae a pyca ... 10
pepa paaex
paece .............................. 13
y 1 a ca
a .............................................. 14
ee ce pee .... 14
cae aape a
(ppeaec
e) ........................... 15
y 2 caa a pee ..... 19
y 3 caa acce .................. 22
Oce epa
Bcpeee acce ..................... 23
pcp ac a pae
eepa ......................................... 30
ac c py eaa
eepa ......................................... 32
cepecae epa
Bcpeee e c ea
pae ...................................... 36
Bcpeee e c p
ea ........................................ 38
eee pae, acax a
ee y PB ZOOM
acce .............................................. 41
cp c a c
y a ye e ... 43
Haee pa ..................................... 44
Cae ccex p ............... 49
Mappa acce ............................... 52
c pa ac a accee py
c pa .................................... 56
c ac ae
c a ...................................... 58
c
c/capae ...... 61
pae pax ap
y a ........................ 64
Ma
epeac acce ................................ 67
epeac yx
p a ppa
(a acceax) ...................................... 71
cae c aa
eaapayp ep
y pepaa
caa ............................................... 88
Bcaa a c py
eaa
Ma ca ............................. 90
Ayepeac ..................................... 93
pcp pae, acax a
acce, c epa
( aee
Windows) ............................................. 96
Bee yax
acpe eaa
eee yca e ................. 107
Oepa c Memory Stick

cae Memory Stick
Beee ....................................... 118
ac pae c acce a
e pae .......... 127
ac pae c acce a
pae .............. 131
ac peapax pae
a pae
p a ppa
(a Memory Stick) .......................... 135
pae ex pae
c acce Cxpaee a
c ................................... 140
pcp e pae
Bcpeee c
a .............................................. 142
pcp pae
Bcpeee
a MPEG ................................. 147
pcp pae, acax a

Memory Stick, c
epa ..................................... 150
pae pae, acax
a Memory Stick, a acce ....... 162
eee ex pae,
acax a Memory Stick PB
ZOOM a .................................. 164
Bcpeee pae
epep ceaec
ayy y
SLIDE SHOW ................................. 166
pepaee cya cpa
aa pae ................... 168
aee pae ........................ 169
ac ea aa
PRINT MARK ................................. 172
cpaee ecpace
T ecpace ep x
ycpae ...................................... 183
a caac ............... 189
peypeae ap
ce ........................................ 190
ea pa
cyee acce ......................... 192
O aape e InfoLITHIUM ..... 195
O aee i.LINK ...................................... 197
cae eaa a
pae ........................................... 199
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc ................ 201
Texece xapaepc ............... 209
pa cpa
Oaee ace peyp ..... 211
Aa yaae ... a a
a cyaa
cae
a pyca
Getting started
Using this manual

The instructions in this manual are for the two
models listed in the table below. Before you start
reading this manual and operating your VCR,
check the model number by looking at the
bottom of your VCR. The GV-D1000 is the model
used for illustration purposes. Otherwise, the
model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any
differences in operation are clearly indicated in
the text, for example, GV-D1000 only.
As you read through this manual, buttons and
settings on your VCR are shown in capital letters.
e.g. Set the POWER switch to ON.
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a
beep sound to indicate that the operation is being
carried out.
Type of differences
GV-
D1000
D1000E
Video signal
NTSC
PAL
NTSC PB
z
Provided
Not provided
Contents of the recording cannot be

compensated if recording or playback is not
made due to a malfunction of the VCR, storage
media, etc.
Note on Cassette Memory

Your VCR is based on the DV format. You can
only use mini DV cassettes with your VCR. We
recommend that you use a tape with cassette
memory
.
The functions which require different operations
depending on whether the tape has the cassette
memory or not are:
Date search (p. 58)
Photo search (p. 61)
The functions you can operate only with the
cassette memory are:
Title search (p. 56)
Superimposing a title (p. 44)
Labeling a cassette (p. 52)
For details, see page 192.
10
cpy ace pyce cc

y e, pee ae e.
pee e pcy e a
pyca cyaa eaa,
pepe ep e, yaa a e
cpe eaa. ce
cyec e GV-D1000. Ec ce
cc py e, ee ep ye
yaa a pcye. e pa pae
e apac ece, apep,
T e GV-D1000.
p e a pyca yae,
yca a eae
aa aa ya.
Hapep. cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
p e epa a eae
B cee yca yep ca,
epa ee epa.
T pa
GV-
D1000
D1000E
Beca
NTSC
PAL
NTSC PB
z
Oeceaec
He eceaec
Cepe aca aepaa

e cca, ec ac
cpeee e yc pe
ecpac eaa, ce
..
peae ce
acce a
Ba ea cye pa DV.
Bae eaa
ca acce DV.
Peeyec ca acce c
acce a
.
y, cyee -pay
acc , ee accea
accey a e:
c a (cp. 58)
c (cp. 61)
y, pe ca
p a acce a:
c pa (cp. 56)
Haee pa (cp. 44)
Mappa acce (cp. 52)
pee c. a cp. 192.
Using this manual

You see this mark in the introduction of
the features that are operated only with
cassette memory.
Note on TV color systems

GVD1000 only
Note on TV colour systems

GVD1000E only
TV colour systems differ from country to
country. To view your recordings on a TV, you
need a PAL system-based TV.
Ha acceax c acce a eec ea

(accea a).
Cce e eee
T e GV-D1000
Cce e eee ac
acc cpa. pcpa Bax
ace a pae eepa ex
ca eep a ae cce NTSC.
Cce e eee
T e GV-D1000E
Cce e eee ac
acc cpa. pcpa Bax
ace a pae eepa ex
ca eep a ae cce PAL.
a cyaa
TV color systems differ from country to country.

To view your recordings on a TV, you need an
NTSC system-based TV.
a ea cpae ce
y, pe cyc
p a acce a.
Getting started
Tapes with cassette memory are marked by

(Cassette Memory).
cae a pyca
Copyright precautions
Television programs, films, video tapes, and
other materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such materials may
be contrary to the provision of the copyright
laws.
pecepeee apc
pae
Teee ppa, ,
ee pye aepa y
ae apc pa.
Heepaa ac ax aepa
e ppe e aa
apc pae.
11
Using this manual
cae a pyca
Precautions on VCR care

The LCD screen is manufactured using
extremely high-precision technology, so over
99.99% of the pixels are operational for
effective use. However, there may be some
tiny black points and/or bright points (white,
red, blue or green in color) that constantly
appear on the LCD screen. These points are
normal in the manufacturing process and do
not affect the recording in any way.
Do not let your VCR get wet. Keep your VCR
away from rain and sea water. Letting your
VCR get wet may cause your VCR to
malfunction. Sometimes this malfunction
cannot be repaired [a].
Never leave your VCR exposed to temperatures
above 60C (140F ), such as in a car parked in
the sun or under direct sunlight [b].
Be careful when placing the VCR near a
window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD screen
to direct sunlight for long periods may cause
malfunctions [c].
[a]
12
[b]
Mep pecpc p
yxe a ea
pa e c
c ex, y ee
99,99% paa peaae
e ca. Oa a
pae y c c
epe / pe (ee, pace,
ce eee). ee x e
ca c pecc e,
ac e a ac.
He ycae, ea
cac a. pexpae
ea pc .
Ec B ae ea,
e pec ecpac aapaa.
a ecpac ycpa e
[a].
Ha e cae ea
ecax, e eepaypa aec e
60C, apep, ae,
papa ce ece,
p ce ce [b].
ye ae, a caee
ea a e
ee. ece p ce
cea a pa eee e
pee e pec e ecpac
[c].
[c]
Checking supplied
accessories
pepa paaex
paece
Make sure that the following accessories are

supplied with your VCR.
eec, ceye paec

x e eaa.
1 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor (1),

power cord (mains lead) (1) (p. 14, 16)
2 A/V converting cable (1) (p. 30, 32, 88, 93,
129, 133)
3 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 30, 32, 88, 93,
129, 133)
4 USB cable (1) (p. 99, 152)
5 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (p. 43, 215)
6 Size R6 (AA) battery for Remote
Commander (2) (p. 216)
a cyaa
Getting started
1 Cee aaep epee a

AC-L10A/L10B/L10C (1), p
epa (1) (cp. 14, 16)
2 pepaae ae ay/
e (1) (cp. 30, 32, 88, 93, 129, 133)
3 Cee ae ay/e
(1) (cp. 30, 32, 88, 93, 129, 133)
4 ae USB (1) (cp. 99, 152)
5 ecp y ca
ypae (1) (cp. 43, 215)
7 CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB Driver) (1) (p. 98,

151)
6 aapea paepa R6 (AA) ya

ca ypae (2) (cp.
216)
8 21-pin adaptor (1) (p. 31) (European models

only)
7 a-c (paep USB SPVD-008)

(1) (cp. 98, 151)
8 21-p aaep (1) (cp. 31)
( epecx ee)
13
Step 1 Preparing the

power supply
Connecting to a wall outlet
(wall socket)
When you use your VCR for an extended period,
we recommend that you power it from a wall
outlet (wall socket) using the AC power adaptor.
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the
AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack on your
VCR with the plugs v mark facing right.
(2) Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the
AC power adaptor.
(3) Connect the power cord (mains lead) to a
wall outlet (wall socket).
PRECAUTION
The set is not disconnected from the AC power
source (house current) (mains) as long as it is
connected to a wall outlet (wall socket), even if the
set itself has been turned off.
Notes
The AC power adaptor can supply power even if
the battery pack (optional) is attached to your
VCR.
The DC IN jack has source priority. This means
that the battery pack (optional) cannot supply any
power if the power cord (mains lead) is
connected to the DC IN jack, even when the
power cord (mains lead) is not plugged into a
wall outlet (wall socket).
Keep the AC power adaptor away from your
VCR if the picture is disturbed.
14
y 1 a
ca a
ee ce pee
p e cyaa
eaa peeyec ca
ae ce pe c cee
aaepa epee a.
(1) Ope py ea DC IN
cee cee aaep
epee a ey DC IN
eaa a, ea v a
eepe a apaea pa.
(2) cee p epa
aaepy epee a.
(3) cee p epa
ce pee.
2,3
PEOCTEPEEHE
Aapa e aec ce pe
(ca a epee a), a
e cey pey, ae ec ca
aapa e.
pea
ae cee aaepa epee
a e aac ae cyae, ec
aape (ppeaec
e) cee Baey
eay.
e DC IN aae ppe
ca. aae, ae
aape a (ppeaec
e) e aec, a p
epa cee ey DC IN,
ae ec p epa e e
cey pey.
Ec paee caaec, e
cee aaep epee a ae
eaa.
Step 1 Preparing the power supply
y 1 a ca a
When you use your VCR outdoors

Use the battery pack (optional).
p ca eaa
e ee
Using with a battery pack

(optional)
Installing the battery pack

Press and slide the battery pack in the direction
of the arrow.
cye aaep/ape ycpc

c a Sony (ppeaec
e).
cae aape a
(ppeaec e)
Ba ea paae c
aape InfoLITHIUM (cep M).
caa aape a
Hae a aape ce e
apae cpe.
BATT
a cyaa
You VCR operates only with the InfoLITHIUM

battery pack (M series).
cae a
ayypa
Getting started
Using a car battery

Use the Sony DC Adaptor/Charger (optional).
cye aape (ppeaec

e)
Battery Pack
(optional)/
aape
(ppeaec
e)
To remove the battery pack
c aape a
While pressing
to the right.
Haa a y
BATT, ce
aape pa.
BATT, slide the battery pack
After installing the battery pack

Do not carry your VCR by holding the battery
pack. If you do so, the battery pack may slide off
and cause damage to your VCR.
Remaining battery time indicator
When you use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack, the
remaining battery time is displayed on the
screen. It may not be displayed properly,
however, depending on the conditions and
circumstances of use. A message appears when
the battery is dead. When you close the LCD
panel and open it again, it takes about one
minute for the correct remaining battery time to
be displayed.
ce yca aape a
He epece c ea, epa
e a aape . B p cyae
aape e ccy c
eaa, e pec e
pee.
ap caec pee pa
aape a
p ca aape a
InfoLITHIUM caeec pe pa
aape a paaec a pae. O
e paac e cce
acc yc cec,
px cyec aapaypa. a
aape pape, paaec
cecyee cee. Ec ap
ae p ee ca,
pe epe yy c
a, paaa e caeec
pe pa aape a.
15
y 1 a ca a
Charging the battery pack
apa aape a
You can charge the battery with your VCR.

Use the battery pack after charging it for your
VCR.
aape apa, e ca
e c eaa.
ce ap aape a cye
e eaa.
(1) Install the battery pack.

(2) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the
AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack with the
plugs v mark facing right.
(3) Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the
AC power adaptor.
(4) Connect the power cord (mains lead) to a wall
outlet (wall socket).
(5) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). When
charging begins, the POWER ON/CHARGE
lamp lights up orange. When the battery pack
is charged fully, the POWER ON/CHARGE
lamp goes off. (full charge)
OFF(CHG)
(1) cae aape .

(2) Ope py ea DC IN
cee cee aaep
epee a ey DC IN, a
ea v a eepe a
epya pa.
(3) cee p epa
aaepy epee a.
(4) cee p epa
epec ce.
(5) cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG). a apa
aaec, aa POWER ON/
CHARGE apaec pae ce.
a aape ye c
ape, aa POWER ON/CHARGE
ace. (a apa)
ON
POWER
1
2
3
16
After charging the battery pack
ce ap aape a
Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC

IN jack on your VCR.
Ocee cee aaep epee a

ea DC IN a eae.
Note
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact
with the metal parts of the DC plug of the AC
power adaptor. Otherwise, a short-circuit may
occur and damage the AC power adaptor.
peae
He ycae aa eaecx
pee c eaec ac eepa
c a cee aaepa
epee a. ae e p
pe aae peee cee
aaepa epee a.
y 1 a ca a
Charging time/Bpe ap
Full charge/
a apa
150
NP-FM70
240
NP-QM71
260
NP-FM90
330
NP-QM91/FM91
360
Bpe ap e yec, ec
eepaypa aape a e ca
a -a eepayp pyae
cpe.
pee pe yax p 25C
ap c pape aape
a
Playing time/Bpe cpee

Battery pack/
aape
NP-FM50
NP-FM70
NP-QM71
NP-FM90
NP-QM91/FM91
Playing time on LCD screen/

Playing time with LCD closed/
Bpe cpee a pae Bpe cpee p ap
90
140
195
225
270
345
Approximate minutes when you use a fully

charged battery
Approximate continuous playing time at 25C
(77F). The battery life will be shorter if you use
your VCR in a cold environment.
You can charge the battery pack abroad

For details, refer to page 199.
If the power goes off even though the battery
remaining indicator shows that the battery
pack has enough power to operate
Charge the battery pack fully again so that the
battery remaining indicator is corrected.
Recommended charging temperature
We recommend charging the battery pack in an
ambient temperature of between 10C to 30C
(50F to 86F).
a cyaa
The charging time may increase if the batterys

temperature is extremely high or low because of
the ambient temperature.
Approximate minutes at 25C (77F) to charge an
empty battery pack
Getting started
Battery pack/
aape
NP-FM50
295
340
450
520
pee pe yax p
ca c ape
aape a
pee pe epep
cpee p 25C. p ca
eaa xx ycx cp
cy aape a cpaaec.
aape apa,
axc a pae
pe cee c. a cp. 199.
Ec ae aec, x
ap caec pee pa
aape a aae
ca pa ap
Ca c ape aape ,
ap pa aa
caeec pe pa aape a.
Peeyea eepaypa ap
Peeyec apa aape p
eepaype pyae cpe 10C
30C.
17
y 1 a ca a
What is InfoLITHIUM?
ae InfoLITHIUM?
The InfoLITHIUM is a lithium ion battery pack

which can exchange data, such as battery
consumption, with compatible electronic equipment.
This VCR is compatible with the InfoLITHIUM
battery pack (M series). Your VCR operates only
with the InfoLITHIUM battery pack. The
InfoLITHIUM battery pack M series has the
mark.
InfoLITHIUM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
InfoLITHIUM pecae c e aape , p e

eac a, a a peee
ep aape a, c cec
ep pyae.
ea cec c aape
InfoLITHIUM (cep M). Ba
ea paae c
aape InfoLITHIUM. Ha
aape e InfoLITHIUM cep M
eec ea
.
InfoLITHIUM ec p ap
ppa Sony.
18
Set the date and time when you use your VCR for
the first time. CLOCK SET will be displayed
each time that you set the POWER switch to ON,
unless you set the date and time.
If you do not use your VCR for about four
months, the date and time settings may be lost
(bars may appear) because the built-in
rechargeable battery installed in your VCR will
have been discharged (p. 203).
Set the year, month, day, hour and then the
minute, in that order.
p ep ca eaa
e ycay a pee. a e
ye ea ycaa a pee,
a pa p ycae epeae
POWER ee ON ye paac
a CLOCK SET.
Ec ea e ye cac
epex ece, yca a
pee y ep (y c
ep), a a cpea ayypa
aapea, ycaea eae,
papc (cp. 203).
Be yca ceye pe:
, ec, e, ac, a ae y.
(1)
(2)
Prepare the power supply (p. 14-18).

While pressing PUSH OPEN v, open the
LCD panel.
(3) While pressing the small green button on
the POWER switch, set it to ON. The
POWER ON/CHARGE lamp (green) on the
front lights up.
(4) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
CLOCK SET, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust
the desired year, then press the dial.
(8) Set the month, day, and hour by turning the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the
dial.
(9) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial and pressing the dial by the time
signal. The clock starts to move.
(10) Press MENU to make the menu settings
disappear.
(1)
(2)
e c a (cp. 14-18).
Haa y PUSH OPEN v, pe
ae .
(3) Haa a aey eey y a
epeaee POWER, ycae e
ee ON. apaec (eea)
aa POWER ON/CHARGE,
pacea a epee ae.
(4) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa CLOCK SET, ae ae a
c.
pa y a, ae ae a
c.
(8) cae ec, e ac ye
pae ca SEL/PUSH EXEC
aa a e.
(9) cae y ye pae ca
SEL/PUSH EXEC aa a c
cay pee. ac ay
paa.
(10) Hae y MENU, ce
yca e.
OFF(CHG)
a cyaa
y 2 caa
a pee
Getting started
Step 2 Setting the

date and time
ON
POWER
PUSH OPEN
19
Step 2 Setting the date and time
MENU
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
y 2 caa a pee
5
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
--- -- ----
2002
JAN 1
12 00
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
7
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
2002
JAN 1
12 00
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
JAN 1
12 00
AM
[MENU] : END
2002
AM
[MENU] : END
9
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
2002
JUL 4
5 30
[MENU] : END
20
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
PM
[MENU] : END
JUL 4 2002
5:30:00 PM
AM
Step 2 Setting the date and time
y 2 caa a pee
The year changes as follows:
ye ec cey
pa:
1995 T t 2002 T t 2079
Note on the time indicator (GV-D1000 only)

The internal clock of your VCR operates on a
12-hour cycle.
12:00 AM stands for midnight.
12:00 PM stands for noon.
peae ce apa
pee ( e GV-D1000)
Note on the time indicator (GV-D1000E only)

The date indicator displays 4 7 2002.
The internal clock of your VCR operates on a
24-hour cycle.
Ha accee a Memory Stick e a

ye acaa a --- -- ---- --:--:--.
Bypee ac eaa paa

12-ac pee.
12:00 AM cecye y.
12:00 PM cecye y.
peae ce apa
pee ( e GV-D1000E)
ap paae 4 7 2002.
Bypee ac eaa paa
24-ac pee.
a cyaa
Ec B e ycae ay pe
Getting started
If you do not set the date and time

--- -- ---- --:--:-- is recorded on the data code
of the tape and Memory Stick.
21
Step 3 Inserting a
cassette
y 3 caa
acce
You can use the
M ca acce DV c
mini DV cassette only.
(1) Slide EJECT in the direction of the arrow. The

cassette compartment automatically lifts up
and opens.
(2) Insert a cassette with the window facing up.
(3) Close the cassette compartment by pressing
the PUSH mark on the cassette compartment.
EJECT
(1) epee epeae EJECT

apae cpe. acce ce
aaec ec epx
pec.
(2) Bcae accey a,
pae epx.
(3) ape acce ce, aa a e
ey PUSH.
PUSH
To eject a cassette
ee acce
Follow the procedure above, and eject the

cassette in step 2.
Be yaay e peypy e
accey ye 2.
Notes
Do not insert your fingers or touch the inside of
the cassette compartment with your fingers
when it is open. It may cause your VCR to
malfunction.
The cassette compartment should not be closed
with any part of the cassette compartment other
than the PUSH mark.
Do not close the cassette compartment until it
opens completely. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
pea
When you use a cassette with cassette

memory
Read the instructions about cassette memory to
use this function properly (p. 192).
p ca acce c acce
a
To prevent accidental erasure

Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to
expose the red mark.
22
a acce ce p, e
pacaec aa e ype
ac. e pec ecpac
eaa.
He ceye apa acce ce,
aa a ae- pye e ac,
pe e PUSH.
He apae py acce cea,
a a c e pec. e
pec ecpac.
pa ac ye
acce a, ae pae
cecye cpy (cp. 192).
pepae cya cpa

epee eec a ac a
accee, a ac paca ea.
Basic Operations
Oce epa
Playing back a tape
Bcpeee acce
You can control playback using the Remote

Commander supplied with your VCR.
Set COMMANDER to VTR 2 in the menu
settings. (The default setting is VTR 2.)
M ypa cpeee c
paae eay ya
ca ypae.
cae COMMANDER ee VTR 2
ycaax e. (caa ya VTR 2.)
(1) e c a cae
accey cpee.
(2) Haa a aey eey y a
epeaee POWER, ycae e
ee ON.
apaec (eea) aa POWER ON/
CHARGE, pacea a epee
ae.
(3) Hae y H aaa
cpee.
(4) Opeypye pc c
LCD BRIGHT.
(5) Opeypye pc c
VOLUME.
Basic Operations Oce epa
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert a

cassette to play back.
(2) While pressing the small green button on the
POWER switch, set it to ON.
The POWER ON/CHARGE lamp (green) on
the front lights up.
(3) Press H to start playback.
(4) Adjust the brightness using LCD BRIGHT.
(5) Adjust the volume using VOLUME.
LCD
BRIGHT
OFF(CHG)
ON
POWER
PLAY
REW
FF
STOP
VOLUME
DISPLAY
To stop playback
ca cpee
Press x.
Hae y x.
23
Playing back a tape

After playback
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).

Eject the cassette.
Close the LCD panel.
Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the
DC IN jack on your VCR.
Note on the DISPLAY button

Press DISPLAY to display the screen indicators.
To make the indicators disappear, press it again.
(p. 64)
If you leave the power on for a long time
Your VCR gets warm. This is not a malfunction.
Bcpeee acce
ce cpee
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG).
(2) ee accey.
(3) ape ae .
(4) Ocee cee aaep epee
a ea DC IN a eae.
peae ce DISPLAY
Hae y DISPLAY pae
pax ap. Hae ee ee pa,
ap ce. (cp. 64)
Ec ca ae e a
ee pe
Bea apeec. Oa e
ec ecpac.
24
Playing back a tape

Various playback modes
Bcpeee acce
Pae pe cpee
ca ypae
epaee ycae epeae
POWER ee ON.
Playback pause (to view a still

image)
aya cpee ( pcpa

e pae)
Press X during playback. To resume playback,

press X or H.
To advance the tape

Press M in stop mode. To resume normal
playback, press H.
To rewind the tape

Press m in stop mode. To resume normal
playback, press H.
To change the playback direction

Press c
during playback to reverse the
playback direction. To resume normal playback,
press H.
To locate a scene while searching the

picture (picture search)
Press and hold m or M during playback. To
resume normal playback, release the button.
To monitor the high-speed picture at

high speed while advancing or
rewinding the tape (skip scan)
Press and hold m while rewinding or M while
advancing the tape. To resume rewinding or
advancing, release the button.
To view the picture at slow speed

(slow playback)
Press y during playback. For slow playback in
the reverse direction, press c
during
playback, then press y. To resume normal
playback, press H.
To view the picture frame-by-frame

Press
C frame (+) in playback pause mode.
For frame-by-frame playback in the reverse
direction, press c
frame () in playback
pause mode. To resume normal playback, press
H.
(Continued on the following page)
B pe cpee ae y X.
e cpee
ae y X H.
ycpe epe e epe

Hae pee ca y M.
e cpee
ae y H.
ycpe epe e aa
Hae pee ca y m.
e cpee
ae y H.
ee apae
cpee
To operate the video control buttons, set the

POWER switch to ON.
B pe cpee ae y
c
ee apae
cpee. e
cpee ae y H.
ca a pe ca
pae (c pae)
epe aa y m M pe
cpee. e
cpee yce y.
p pae a c
cpc pe epe e
epe aa (c e pa)
epe aa y m pe epe
e aa y M pe epe
e epe. e epe
e epe aa yce y.
pcpa pae a
aee cpc (aeee
cpeee)
B pe cpee ae y y.
aee cpee pa
apae pe cpee
ae y c
, ae ae y
y. e
cpee ae y H.
ap pcpa
cpee pae
Hae y
C apa (+) pee
ay cpee. ap
cpee pa apae
ae y c
apa () pee
ay cpee. e
cpee ae y H.
(pee a ceye cpae)
25
Playing back a tape
Bcpeee acce
To view the picture at double speed
pcpa cpee
pae a ye cpc
Press 2 on the Remote Commander during

playback. For double speed playback in the
reverse direction, press c
, then press 2 on
the Remote Commander. To resume normal
playback, press H.
In the various playback modes
Sound is muted.
The previous picture may remain as a mosaic
image during playback.
When playback pause mode lasts for 5
minutes
Your VCR automatically enters the stop mode.
To resume playback, press H.
Slow playback
Slow playback can be performed smoothly on
your VCR. However, this function does not work
for an output signal through the DV jack.
When you play back a tape in reverse
Horizontal noise may appear at the center or top
and bottom of the screen. This is not a
malfunction.
Using headphones
Connect headphones (optional) to the i
(headphones) jack (p. 213). You can adjust the
volume of the headphones by using the
VOLUME +/ buttons.
When you connect headphones, the sound does
not output from the speakers except the beep
sound.
26
B pe cpee ae y 2
a ye ca ypae.
cpee a ye cpc
pa apae ae y c
,
a ae ae y 2 a ye
ca ypae. e
cpee ae y H.
B pax peax cpee
y ye pye.
B pe cpee peya ac
e paac a ae
paee.
Ec pe ay cpee
pc 5 y
Bea aaec epec
pe caa.
e cpee ae
y H.
aeee cpeee
Ha Bae eae
ae aeee cpeee. Oa
a y e paae, a x
ca aec epe e DV.
p cpee e pa
apae
B epe epxy y paa y
c pae ex. Oa
e ec ecpac.
cae x ee
cee e ee
(ppeac e) ey i
(e ee) (cp. 213). pc
x eeax peypa c
VOLUME +/.
p cee x ee y
ppee e c, a
cee yep caa.
Playing back a tape
Bcpeee acce
Playing back a dual soundtrack

tape
When you play back a dual soundtrack tape,
select the desired sound in the menu settings.
Bcpeee e c
y p
p cpee e c y
p epe y y ycaax
e.
(1) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa HiFi SOUND, a ae ae a
c.
pa y ya, ae ae a
c.
pe cee yx peax
c. a cp. 194.
(5) Hae y MENU ,
ypa e.
1
MENU

,
then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select HiFi
SOUND, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired sound, then press the dial.
For details about the sound mode, refer to
page 194.
(5) Press MENU to make the menu disappear.
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
3
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
STEREO
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
STEREO
1
2
[MENU] : END
STEREO
1
2
[MENU] : END
27
Playing back a tape
Bcpeee acce
Using a Remote Commander
cae ya ca
ypae
You can operate your VCR using the Remote

Commander supplied with your VCR, or a Sony
product.
Set COMMANDER in the menu settings,
according to the remote control code of the Sony
product. (p. 112)
The remote control code of the Remote
Commander supplied with your VCR is VTR 2.
Code
Sony product
VTR 1
Betamax VCR
VTR 2
8mm video camera recorder

Digital video camera recorder
8mm VCR
Aapaypa Sony
VTR 1
Bea Betamax
VTR 3
VHS VCR
VTR 2
VTR 4
Digital VCR
Digital video camera recorder
VTR 5 and 6
Digital VCR
Beaepa caapa 8mm

pa eaepa
Bea caapa
8mm
Notes
You cannot set the POWER switch to ON or
OFF (CHG), or eject the cassette with the
Remote Commander.
Your VCR may not be controlled with the
Remote Commander of the double deck and
VHS VCR.
28
pa Ba ea c
ya ca ypae,
paae eay py
aapaype Sony.
cae apaepa COMMANDER
ycaax e cecy ya
ca ypae aapayp Sony.
(cp. 117)
ca ypae
paae eay ya
ca ypae ec VTR 2.
VTR 3
Bea VHS
VTR 4
p ea
pa eaepa
VTR 5 6
p ea
pea
C ya ca ypae
e yca epeae POWER
ee ON OFF (CHG) e
accey.
Ba ea e ypa
c ya ca ypae
yxacce eaa
eaa VHS.
Playing back a tape
Bcpeee acce
Wide mode playback and

recording
Bcpeee ac
ppa pee
[a]
Ha Bae eae
cp pae, acae c
p eaep Sony
ee pa pae 16:9. pe
cee c. cpy cyaa
Bae eepa.
B pe cpee pee 16:9 WIDE
a pae c epe c [a].
paee pe cpee a
[b] ppa eepe [c]
ye ca pe. p ycae
pa pea ppa
eepe c pa 16:9 pae yy
e paep [d].
[b]
16:9WIDE
[c]
Connection for a TV
Pictures recorded in 16:9 WIDE mode
automatically appear on the TV screen at full size
when
you connect your VCR to a TV that is
compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ID-2)
system. (GV-D1000 only)
you connect your VCR to the S video jack on
the TV.
ID-1 system (GV-D1000 only)
The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio information
(16:9, 4:3, or letter box) with video signals. If you
connect a TV compatible with the ID-1 system,
the screen size is automatically selected.
ID-2 system (GV-D1000 only)
The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection
signal with ID-1 signals inserted between video
signals when you connect your VCR to other
equipment with the A/V connecting cable.
When recording a 16:9 screen
Your VCR automatically detects the wide mode
signals and records in wide mode.
Pictures recorded with a Sony digital video

camera recorder that have an aspect ratio of 16:9
on your VCR can be played back. For details,
refer to the operating instructions of your TV.
Black bands appear on the screen during
playback in 16:9 WIDE mode [a]. The picture
during playback on a normal TV [b] or a widescreen TV [c] are compressed widthwise. If you
set screen mode of a 16:9 wide-screen TV to the
full mode, you can see normal images [d].
[d]
ceee eepa
pae, acae pee 16:9 WIDE,
aaec c ec pa
eepa p
cee eaa
eepy, cecy c ecce ID
(ID-1/ID-2). (T e GV-D1000)
cee eaa
ey S video eepa.
Ccea ID-1 ( e GV-D1000)

Ccea ID-1 epeae pa
pa ce paa (16:9, 4:3
letter box) ece c ecaa. p
cee eepa, cec c
cce ID-1, paep paa paec
aaec.
Ccea ID-2 ( e GV-D1000)

p cee eaa
pyy pya c
cee ae ay/e ccea
ID-2 epeae ca apc paa,
ca ca ID-1 ey ecaa.
p ac pae paa 16:9

Ba ea aaec
pacae ca ppa pea
e ac pee.
29
Viewing the recording

on TV
pcp ac a
pae eepa
Connect your VCR to your TV or to the other

VCR with the A/V connecting cable supplied
with your VCR to watch the playback picture on
the TV screen. Connect the plugs to the jacks
observing the same color code as your VCR and
TV, or other VCR. Refer to the operating
instructions of your TV or the other VCR.
The playback procedure is the same as when
playing back on the screen. Turn down the
volume of your VCR.
pcpa cp pae
a pae eepa cee
ea eepy pyy
eay c cee
ae ay/e, paae
eay. e eep
ea ( e ea) eaa
eepa py eaa. C.
cpy cyaa Bae eepa
py eaa.
peypa cpee aaa ,
cyec p cpee a
pae. ee pc a
eae.
Open the jack cover. Connect your VCR to the TV

using the A/V connecting cable. Then, set the
TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.
Ope py e. e
ea eepy c
cee ae ay/e. ae
ycae ceep TV/VCR a eepe
ee VCR.
S video cable (optional)/

ae S video (ppeaec e)
IN
S VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO OUT
Jack cover/
pa e
: Signal flow/
pxee caa
A/V connecting cable (supplied)/

Cee ae ay/
e (paaec)
If your TV is already connected

to the other VCR
Connect your VCR to the LINE IN input on the
other VCR with the A/V connecting cable
(supplied). Set the input selector on the VCR to
LINE.
If your TV or the other VCR is a

monaural type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting
cable to the video input jack and the white or the
red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or
the TV. If you connect the white plug, the sound
is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the
sound is R (right) signal.
30
Ec eep ye cee
pyy eay
cee ea xy
ey LINE IN a py eae c
cee ae ay/e
(paaec). cae ceep x
caa a eae ee LINE.
Ec Ba eep py
ea
ec a
cee e eep cee
ae ay/e xy ey
ecaa, a e pac eep
xy ey aycaa a
eae eepe. Ec B
cee e eep, B ye
ca aaa L (e). Ec B cee
pac eep, B ye ca aaa
R (pa).
Viewing the recording on TV

If your TV or the other VCR has
a 21-pin connector
(EUROCONNECTOR)
European models only
Ec a eepe py
eae eec 21p pae
(EUROCONNECTOR)
T epecx ee
cye 21-p aaep,
paae Baey eay.
21-p aaep cye
a.
TV or the other VCR/

Teep py ea
If your TV or the other VCR has an S video jack

Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by
using an S video cable (optional). With this
connection, you do not need to connect the
yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable.
Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S
video jacks on both your VCR and the TV.
This connection produces higher quality DV
format pictures.
To display indicators on the TV
Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/LCD in the menu and
press DISPLAY. To turn off, press DISPLAY
again.
Ec a eepe py
eae eec e S video
paee e cpee ee
cep p ca ae S video
(ppeaec e). p a
cee e ac a e
eep (e) cee ae ay/
e. cee ae S video
(ppeaec e) ea S
video a Bae eae
eepe.
ceee e y
caecee paee paa DV.
Use the 21-pin adaptor supplied with your VCR.

The 21-pin adaptor is available for output only.
pcp ac a pae eepa
pae ap a pae
eepa
cae DISPLAY ee V-OUT/LCD
ycaax e ae y DISPLAY.
e ee pa ae y
DISPLAY.
31
Recording from the

other VCR or TV
ac c py
eaa eepa
Using the A/V connecting cable
cae cee
ae ay/e
You can record a tape from the other VCR or a

TV that has audio/video outputs. Use your VCR
as a recorder.
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert a blank
tape (or a tape you want to record over) into
your (recording) VCR. If you are recording a
tape from the other (playback) VCR, insert a
recorded tape into the other (playback) VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to ON.
(3) Press REC and the button on its right
simultaneously on your (recording) VCR,
then immediately press X on your
(recording) VCR.
(4) Press H on the other (playback) VCR to
start playback if you are recording a tape
from the other (playback) VCR. Select a TV
program if you are recording from TV.
The picture from the TV or other VCR
appears on the screen of your (recording)
VCR.
(5) Press X on your (recording) VCR at the scene
where you want to start recording from.
REC
M ac a accey c py
eaa eepa, p
ee x e/ay. cye
ea aece acae
ycpca.
(1) e c a cae
cy accey ( accey, a py
B xe ac) c
(aca) ea. p
ac c py eaa
cae accey, c p ye
pc ac, py
(cp) ea.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(3) Opee ae y REC
y cpaa ee a (acae)
eae, ae cpay ae
y X a Bae (acae)
eae.
(4) Ec ac ec c py
(cpe) eaa,
ae a e y H aaa
cpee. Bepe
eey ppay, ec ac
ec c eepa. paee
c eepa py
eaa c a pae
(acae)
eaa.
(5) Hae y X a Bae
(acae) eae
ece, c p y aa ac.
PAUSE

ae S video (ppeaec
e)
OUT
S VIDEO IN
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
: Signal flow/
pxee
caa
AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT
32

Cee ae ay/e (paaec)
A/V converting cable (supplied)/
pepaae ae ay/e (paaec)
Recording from the other VCR or

TV
ac c py
eaa eepa
When you have finished recording a

tape
ce aepe ac acce
Press x on both your (recording) VCR and other

(playback) VCR.
Using the Remote Commander
Notes
If you use fast-forward or slow-playback mode
on the other (playback) VCR, the image being
recorded may fluctuate. When you record from
the other (playback) VCR, be sure to play back
the original tape at normal speed.
You can record a picture from another VCR or
TV of PAL system only, not from a SECAM
system VCR or TV. (GVD1000E only)
If your VCR is a monaural type
cable to the video output jack and the white or
the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR
or the TV. When the white plug is connected, the
left channel audio is output, and when the red
plug is connected, the right channel audio is
output.
If your TV or other (playback) VCR has an S
video jack
using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect
the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting
cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video
jacks of both your (recording) VCR and the TV or
the other (playback) VCR.
format pictures.
Note on the Remote Commander
Your VCR works in the commander code VTR 2.
Commander codes 1, 2 and 3 are used to
distinguish your VCR from other Sony VCRs to
avoid remote control misoperation. If you use
another Sony VCR in the commander code VTR
2, we recommend changing the commander
mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with
black paper.
cae ya ca
ypae
B ye 3 pee ae
z REC MARK, ae cpay ae y X. A
ye 5 ae y X ece, c p
y aa ac.
pea
B pe cp epe epe pee
aee cpee a py
(cpe) eae
acaee paee e pa. p
ac c py eaa cpe
accey paa a cpc.
M aca paee c a
py eaa eepa,
p paae ccee PAL, a e ccee
SECAM. (T e GV-D1000E)
Ec Ba ea ec
a
cee e eep cee
ae ay/e xy ey
ecaa, a e pac eep -
xy ey aycaa a
eae eepe. p
cee e eepa y ye
aac a e aa, a p cee
pac - a pa.
In step 3, press z REC and MARK

simultaneously, then immediately press X. And
in step 5, press X at the point where you want to
start recording from.
Hae x a (acae) py
(cpe) eaax.
Ec a eepe py
(cpe) eae eec
e S video
paee e cpee ee
cep p ca ae S video
(ppeaec e).
p a cee e ac a
e eep (e) cee ae
ay/e.
cee ae S video (ppeaec
e) ea S video a Bae
(acae) eae eepe
py (cpe) eae.
ceee e y
caecee paee paa DV.
peae ce ya
ca ypae
Ba ea paae, a ycae
VTR 2 ya ca ypae.
ya ca ypae 1, 2 3
cyc a
eaa pyx ea
p Sony eae epa pa
ya ca ypae. Ec
cyec py ea p Sony,
e VTR 2 ya ca
ypae, peeyec e pe ya
ca ypae ap a
ca ypae eaa
ep ya.
33

TV
ac c py
eaa eepa
Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting

cable)
cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting

cable) (optional) to the DV jack of your VCR, and
to DV jack of the DV products. With digital-todigital connection, video and audio signals are
transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.
pc cee ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) (ppeaec
e) ey DV Bae
eaa ey DV aapa DV.
p ca p cee
e- ayca epeac p
e ceye caece
aa.

your (recording) VCR, and insert the
recorded tape into the other (playback) VCR.
simultaneously on your (recording) VCR,
then immediately press X on your
(recording) VCR.
(4) Press H on the other (playback) VCR to
start playback.
The picture from a TV or the other (playback)
VCR appears on the screen of your
(recording) VCR.
(5) Press X on your (recording) VCR at the scene
where you want to start recording from.
(1) e c a cae
cy accey ( accey, a py B
xe ac) c
(aca) ea, cae
ae acay accey py
(cp) ea.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(3) Opee ae y REC
y cpaa ee a (acae)
eae, ae cpay ae
y X a Bae (acae)
eae.
(4) Hae y H a py
(cpe) eae
aaa cpee.
paee c eepa py
(cpe) eaa
c a pae (acae)
eaa.
(5) Hae y X a Bae
(acae) eae
ece, c p y aa ac.
REC
DV
DV
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)/
ae i.LINK (cee ae DV)
(ppeaec e)
: Signal flow/
pxee caa
34
DV
PAUSE

TV
ac c py
eaa eepa
When you have finished recording a

tape
ce aepe ac acce
Press x on both your (recording) VCR and the

other (playback) VCR.
Note
If the connected equipment has a different kind
of i.LINK system, it is not compatible with your
VCR.
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK
cable (DV connecting cable).
See page 197 for more information about i.LINK.
cae ya ca
ypae
B ye 3 pee ae
z REC MARK, ae cpay ae y X.
A ye 5 ae y X ece, c
p y aa ac.
peae
Ec ea aapaypa cye
py cce i.LINK, a e ceca c
ea.
B ee ce
ea c ae
i.LINK (cee ae DV).
C. cp. 197 ye ex
cee aee i.LINK.
During digital editing

The color of the display may be uneven.
However, this does not affect the dubbed picture.
B pe p aa
If you record a playback pause picture with

the DV jack
The recorded picture becomes rough, and when
you play back the picture using your VCR, the
picture may jitter.
p ac e pae c
ea DV
Before recording
Make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on
the screen by pressing the DISPLAY button. The
DV IN indicator may appear on both equipment.
Your VCR works in the commander code VTR 2.
Commander codes 1, 2 and 3 are used to
black paper.

in step 5, press X at the point where you want to
Hae y x a (acae)
py (cpe) eaax.
e pae e ep.
Oa e e a epeac
pae.
acae paee ye ec
aeca, a p cpee pae
a a eae e
pa.
epe ac
eec, p aa a y DISPLAY
a pae paaec ap DV IN.
ap DV IN e c a x
aapaax.
peae ce ya
ca ypae
Ba ea paae, a
ycae VTR 2 ya ca
ypae. ya ca
ypae 1, 2 3 cyc
a eaa pyx
ea p Sony eae
epa pa ya ca
ypae. Ec cyec py
ea p Sony, e
VTR 2 ya ca ypae,
peeyec e pe ya
ca ypae ap a
ca ypae eaa
ep ya.
35
Advanced Operations
cepecae epa
Playing back a tape

with picture effects
Bcpeee e c
ea pae
You can digitally process playback images to

obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.
M py pay
cpx pae ye
ceax e, a ax
a eee.
NEG.ART [a] : The colors and brightness of the

image are reversed.
SEPIA :
The image is sepia.
B&W :
The image is monochrome (blackand-white).
SOLARIZE [b] : The light intensity is clearer, and
the image looks like an
illustration.
[a]
(1) Press MENU in the playback or playback

pause mode.
,
P EFFECT, then press the dial.
desired picture effect mode, then press the
dial.
disappear.
NEG.ART [a] : ea pc pae

yy ea.
SEPIA:
paee ye ea
ce.
B&W:
paee ye
xp (ep-e).
SOLARIZE [b]: ecc cea ye
yeea, a paee
ye e, a pcy.
[b]
(1) Hae y MENU pee

cpee ay
cpee.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa P EFFECT, ae ae a c.
pa y pea ea
pae, a ae ae a c.
(5) Hae y MENU, ce
yca e.
1
MENU
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
[MENU] : END
2,3
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
36
OFF
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
OFF
NEG.ART
SEPIA
B&W
SOLARIZE
Playing back a tape with picture

effects
Bcpeee e c
ea pae
To cancel the picture effect function
e y e
pae
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.
Pictures processed by the picture effect

function
Pictures processed by the picture effect function
are not output through the DV jack.
When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)
or stop playback
The picture effect function is automatically
canceled.
cae P EFFECT ee OFF

ycaax e.
pea
B e ee e pae,
eee ee ca, c
y e pae.
B e ee aca pae a
accey a Bae eae, ec B
paa pae c y
e pae. Oa pae
aca a Memory Stick (cp. 127,
131) a ea, cy e
aece ppae.
pae, eee c
y e pae
pae, eee c
y e pae, e c
epe e DV.
p ycae epeae POWER

ee OFF (CHG) cae
cpee
y e pae aaec
aec.
Basic Operations
Advanced Operations
Ocecepecae
epa
epa
Notes
You cannot process externally input scenes
using the picture effect function.
You cannot record images on a tape on your VCR
when you have processed the image using the
picture effect function. However, you can record
images on a Memory Stick (p. 127, 131), or on a
VCR using your VCR as a player.
37
Playing back a tape

with digital effects
Bcpeee e
c p ea
You can add special effects on playback images

using the various digital functions.
B ee a ceae e
cpy pae c
pax px y.
STILL
You can play back a still image so that it is
superimposed on a moving image.
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)
You can play back still images successively at
constant intervals.
LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)
You can mask a brighter area in a still image with
a moving image.
TRAIL
You can play back the image so that an incidental
trailing image is left.
STILL
M cp ee
paee a, ye ae a
e paee.
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)

Hee pae
cp ceae epe
peeee epa.
LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)
B ee e pe eca a
e pae a e
pae.
TRAIL
B ee cp paee c
e aaa.
Still image/
Hee paee
Moving image/
e paee
STILL
Still image/
Hee paee
LUMI.
38
Moving image/
e paee
Bcpeee e c
p ea
(1) Press MENU in the playback or playback

pause mode.
,
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select D
EFFECT, then press the dial.
desired digital effect mode.
The bars appear. In the STILL and LUMI.
modes, the still image is stored in memory.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the
effect as follows:
(1) Hae y MENU pee

cpee ay
cpee.
, ae ae a c.
pa
pa D EFFECT, ae ae a c.
pa pea y p
ea.
c c. B peax STILL LUMI.
ee paee ye cxpae
a.
peyp ea cey pa:
STILL The rate of the still image you want

to superimpose on the moving
image
FLASH The interval of flash motion
LUMI. The color scheme of the area in the
still image which is to be masked
with a moving image
TRAIL The vanishing time of the
incidental image
STILL ecc e
pae, pe y
a a e
paee
FLASH epa pepc e
LUMI. ea aa ac
e pae,
py y ae
paee
TRAIL Bpe cee
pae
The number of bars on the screen increases as

the degree of effect increases.
c c a pae yeaec p
yce p ea.
1
MENU
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
Basic Operations
Advanced Operations
Ocecepecae
epa
epa
Playing back a tape with digital

effects
[MENU] : END
2,3
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
OFF
VCR SET
D EFFECT
OFF
STILL
FLASH
LUMI.
TRAIL
[MENU] : END
4,5
VCR SET
D EFFECT
OFF
STILL
FLASH
LUMI
TRAIL
VCR SET
D EFFECT
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
STILL
39
Playing back a tape with digital

effects
Bcpeee e c
p ea
To cancel the digital effect function
e y px
e
Set D EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.

Notes
using the digital effect function.
You cannot record images on a tape on your
VCR when you have processed the image using
the digital effect function. However, you can
record images on a Memory Stick (p. 127,
131), or on a VCR using your VCR as a player.
Pictures processed by the digital effect
function
Pictures processed by the digital effect function
are not output through the DV jack.
When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)
or stop playback
The digital effect function is automatically
canceled.
cae D EFFECT ee OFF

ycaax e.
pea
B e ee e pae,
eee ee ca, c
y px e.
B e ee aca pae a
paa pae c y
px e. Oa pae
aca a Memory Stick (cp. 127,
131) a ea, cy c
ea aece ppae.
pae, eee c
y px e
pae, eee c
y px e, e c
epe e DV.
p ycae epeae POWER

ee OFF (CHG) cae
cpee
y px e aaec
c.
40
Enlarging images
recorded on tapes
Tape PB ZOOM
eee pae,
acax a ee
y PB ZOOM acce
You can enlarge moving and still images played

back on tapes. Besides the operation described
here, your VCR can enlarge still images recorded
on Memory Sticks (p. 164).
M yea e ee
pae, cpe a accee.
pe ca ec epa, Ba
ea e yea
ee pae, acae a
Memory Stick (cp. 164).
PB ZOOM
(1) Hae y PB ZOOM pee

cpee ay
cpee. ep pae ye
yee e cpae c cx,
a pae c cpe R r T t.
epeee yee pae,
ae ae a c.
R : paee ceaec .
r : paee ceaec epx.
epeee yee pae,
ae ae a c.
T : paee ceaec pa
(epe c .)
t : paee ceaec e
(epe c epx.)
(4) Opeypye pac ee
acaa c ee
acaa a ye ca
ypae.
M ye paee c
e 1,1 5,0 pa.
W: eee pac ee
acaa.
T: eee pac ee
acaa.
Advanced Operations cepecae epa
(1) Press PB ZOOM in the playback or playback

pause mode. The center of the image is
enlarged to twice its size, and R r T t
appear on the screen.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to move the
enlarged image, then press the dial.
R : The image moves downwards.
r : The image moves upwards.
T : The image moves rightwards (Turn
the dial downwards.)
t : The image moves leftwards (Turn the
dial upwards.)
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom
button on the Remote Commander.
You can enlarge the image from 1.1 times up
to 5.0 times its size.
W: Decreases the zoom ratio.
T: Increases the zoom ratio.
PB ZOOM
2.0
[EXEC] :
PB ZOOM
2.0
[EXEC] :
PB ZOOM
5.0
W
[EXEC] :
41
Enlarging images recorded on

tapes Tape PB ZOOM
eee pae, acax a

ee y PB ZOOM acce
To cancel the Tape PB ZOOM function
e y PB ZOOM
acce
Press PB ZOOM again.
Hae y PB ZOOM ee pa.
Notes
using the PB ZOOM function.
You cannot record images on a tape on your
VCR when you have processed the image using
the PB ZOOM function. However, you can
record images on a Memory Stick (p. 127,
131), or on a VCR using your VCR as a player.
To record an image processed by Tape PB
ZOOM on Memory Sticks
Press PHOTO to record the image processed by
Tape PB ZOOM.
The PB ZOOM function is automatically
canceled when you operate the following
functions:
Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
Stop playback.
Display the menu settings.
Pictures processed by the PB ZOOM function
Pictures processed by the PB ZOOM function are
not output through the DV jack.
pea
B e ee e yee
ee ca pae c
y PB ZOOM.
B e ee aca pae a
paa paee c y
PB ZOOM. Oa pae
aca a Memory Stick (cp. 127, 131)
a ea, cy c
ea aece ppae.
ac pae, paa c
y PB ZOOM acce, a
Memory Stick
Hae PHOTO ac pae,
paa c y PB ZOOM
acce.
y PB ZOOM ye aaec
eea p ca ceyx
y:
caa epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG).
Oca cpee.
Opaee yca e.
pae, eee c
y PB ZOOM
pae, eee c
y PB ZOOM, e c epe e
DV.
42
Quickly locating a
scene using the zero
set memory function
cp c a
c y
a ye e
Your VCR goes forward or backward to

automatically stop at a desired point having a
tape counter value of 0:00:00. Use the Remote
Commander for this operation.
Ba ea e epey
epe aa c aaec ca
y ece, e aae cea e
pa 0:00:00. cye y
ca ypae epa.
DISPLAY
(1) Hae y DISPLAY pee

cpee.
(2) Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY
ece, pe B axe a e.
aae cea cae pa
0:00:00, ae a ap ZERO
SET MEMORY.
(3) Hae y x, a ex ye
ca cpeee.
(4) Hae y m ycpe
epe e ye e cea
e. ea cac aaec,
a ce ce ye e.
ap ZERO SET MEMORY cee,
c pee.
(5) Hae y H. Bcpeee
aec c ye e cea.
ZERO SET MEMORY
(1) Press DISPLAY in the playback mode.

(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you
want to locate later. The tape counter shows
0:00:00 and the ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator flashes.
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape
counters zero point. The tape stops
automatically when the tape counter reaches
approximately zero. The ZERO SET
MEMORY indicator disappears and the time
code appears.
(5) Press H. Playback starts from the counters
zero point.
Notes
When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before
rewinding the tape, the zero set memory
function will be canceled.
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds
from the time code.
If a tape has a blank portion in the recorded
portions
The zero set memory function may not work
correctly.
pea
Ec aa y ZERO SET MEMORY
aaa pa epe e, y
a ye e ye eea.
Mey pee ece
peee e pacxee
ec cey.
Ec a ee eec eaca yac
ey aca ac
y a ye e e
paa eep.
43
Superimposing a title
Haee pa
If you use a tape with cassette memory,

you can superimpose the title. When you
play back the tape, the title is displayed
for five seconds from the point where you
superimposed it.
You can select one of eight preset titles and two
custom titles (p. 49). You can also select the color,
size and position of titles.
Ec cyec accea c acce

a, aee
pa. p cpee e p
ye paac eee
cey c eca, e B a
e.
B ee pa c
peape ycaex p yx
ccex p (cp. 49). M ae
pa e, paep ee p.
VACATION
(1) Press MENU in the playback, playback pause

mode or record pause mode.
,
TITLE, then press the dial.
,
desired title, then press the dial. The titles are
displayed in the language you selected.
(6) Change the color, size, or position, if
necessary.
1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
the COLOR (COLOUR), SIZE, or
POSITION, then press the dial. The item
appears.
2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
the desired item, then press the dial.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid
out as desired.
(7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to complete
the setting.
In the playback or playback pause mode:
The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on the
screen for five seconds and the title is set.
In the recording pause mode:
The TITLE indicator appears. And when you
press X to start recording, TITLE SAVE
appears on the screen for five seconds and
the title is set.
44
(1) Hae y MENU pee

cpee, ay cpee
ay p ac.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa TITLE, ae ae a c.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa y pa, ae ae a
c. Tp paac a pa
e.
(6) ee e, paep ee
pa, ec y.
1 epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa COLOR (COLOUR), SIZE
POSITION, ae ae a c.
c cecy ee.
2 epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa y eea, ae ae
a c.
3 pe y 1 2 ex p,
a p e ye pace
aea pa.
(7) Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC
aepe yca.
B pee cpee ay
cpee:
B eee cey a pae c
ap TITLE SAVE, ycaa pa
ye aepea.
B pee ay ac:
c ap TITLE. Ec B
aee y X aaa ac, a
pae a cey c ap
TITLE SAVE, ycaa pa ye
aepea.
MENU
Haee pa
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
PRESET T I TLE
HELLO !
HAPPY B I RTHDAY
HAPPY HOL I DAYS
CONGRATULAT I ONS !
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDD I NG
VACAT I ON
THE END
[MENU] : END
5
6
PRESET T I TLE
HELLO !
HAPPY B I RTHDAY
HAPPY HOL I DAYS
CONGRATULAT I ONS !
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDD I NG
VACAT I ON
THE END
RETURN
[MENU] : END
S I ZE
SMALL
S I ZE
PRESET T I TLE
HELLO !
HAPPY B I RTHDAY
HAPPY HOL I DAYS
CONGRATULAT I ONS !
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDD I NG
VACAT I ON
THE END
[MENU] : END
PRESET T I TLE
HELLO !
HAPPY B I RTHDAY
HAPPY HOL I DAYS
CONGRATULAT I ONS !
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDD I NG
VACAT I ON
THE END
RETURN
[MENU] : END
T I TLE
VACATION
cepecae epa
CM SET
TITLE
READY
TITLEERASE
TITLE DSPL
CM SEARCH
TAPE TITLE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
Advanced Operations
2,3
[EXEC] : SAVE [MENU] : END
T I TLE
LARGE
VACATION
VACATION
[EXEC] : SAVE [MENU] : END
45
Haee pa
If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to

lock
You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide
the write-protect tab to release the write
protection.
Ec a eec acce
ycae ee a ac
To use the custom title

If you want to use the custom title, select
step 4.
ca cce pa
Ec y ca cce p,
epe
ye 4.
in
If the tape has a blank portion

You cannot superimpose a title on the portion.
If the tape has a blank portion in the middle
of the recorded parts
The title may not be displayed correctly.
The titles superimposed with your VCR
They are displayed by only the DV
format
video equipment with index titler function.
The point you superimposed the title may be
detected as an index signal when searching a
recording with other video equipment.
If the tape has too many index signals
You may not be able to superimpose a title
because the memory is full. In this case, delete
data you do not need.
To not display titles
Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings
(p. 110).
Title setting
The title color changes as follows:
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y
CYAN y GREEN y BLUE
The title size changes as follows:
SMALL y LARGE
You cannot input more than 12 characters in
LARGE size. If you input more than 12
characters, the title size returns to SMALL.
If you select SMALL, you have nine choices for
the title position.
If you select LARGE, you have eight choices for
the title position.
46
B e cee aee
cpae pa. epee eec a
ac e a.

B yace aee pa e.
ey aca ac
Tp e paac epa.
Tp, aee c Bae
eaa
O paac c
eaapayp paa DV
c
ye ec ae p.
Mec ae pa e
apye ecy cay p ce
ac c py eaapayp.
Ec a accee aca c
ecx ca
Bep, aee p ye e,
cy p epeee a. B
cyae yae eye ae.
e pae p
cae TITLE DSPL ee OFF
ycaax e (cp. 115).
caa pa
e pa eec cey pa:
WHITE (E) y YELLOW (ET) y
VIOLET (OETOB) y RED (PACH)
y CYAN (OO) y GREEN (EEH)
y BLUE (CH)
Paep pa eec cey pa:
SMALL (MAEH) y LARGE (OO)
p paepe LARGE e ec ee
12 c. Ec B eee ee
12 c, paep pa pac
ycae SMALL.
Ec paa ycaa SMALL,
pa e apa
pa.
Ec paa ycaa LARGE,
pa c apa
pa.
Haee pa
One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, if

each title consists of no more than five
characters
However, if the cassette memory is full with date,
photo and cassette label data, one cassette can
have only up to about 11 titles with five
characters each.
Cassette memory capacity is as follows:
6 date data
12 photo data
1 cassette label
Oa accea e cepa 20 p,
ec a p cc e ee, e
c
Oa, ec accea a ye cep
ay, ae acce app,
a accee e eac
11 p c ca a.
Ec acce a ceya:
ae 6 a
ae 12 pa
1 accea appa
If the
FULL mark appears
The cassette memory is full. Erase any titles you
do not need.
Ec ec c
FULL
accea a epeea. Cpe ce
eye p.
Advanced Operations
cepecae epa
47
Haee pa
Cpae pa
Erasing a title
(1) Hae y MENU pae

yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa TITLEERASE, ae ae a
c.
pa pa, p ex cepe,
a ae ae a c.
c ap ERASE OK?.
(5) eec, e p, p
B xe cepe, epe c SEL/
PUSH EXEC pa a OK, a
ae ae a c. a OK
cec ae EXECUTE.
pa yca EXECUTE, ae ae
a c.
Ha pae ye a ap
ERASING. a p ye cep,
pac ap COMPLETE.

,
TITLEERASE, then press the dial.
title you want to erase, then press the dial.
ERASE OK? indicator appears.
(5) Make sure the title is the one you want to
erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to
select OK, then press the dial. OK changes to
EXECUTE.
EXECUTE, then press the dial.
ERASING flashes on the screen. When the
title is erased, COMPLETE is displayed.
MENU
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
[MENU] : END
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
[ ME N U ] : E N D
[ ME N U ] : E N D
HE L L O !
CONGRA T U L A T I ONS !
HA P PY NEW Y E AR !
PRE S EN T
GOOD MORN I NG
WEDD I NG
5
T I T L E ERASE
T I T L E ERASE
1
2
3
4
5
6
4 PRESENT
HE L L O !
HA P PY NEW Y E AR !
PRE S EN T
GOOD MORN I NG
WEDD I NG
[ ME N U ] : E N D
48
T I T L E ERASE
CM S E T
T I TLE
T I T L EERASE
T I T LE DSP L
CM S E A R C H
T A PE T I T L E
E R A SE A L L
R E T URN
ERA S E OK ?
R E T URN
OK
[ ME N U ] : E N D
To cancel erasing a title
e cpa pa
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

RETURN in step 6.
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa

RETURN ye 6.
Making your own titles
Cae ccex
p
You can make up to two titles and store them in

your VCR. Each title can have up to 20
characters.
M ca e ee yx p
cxpa x eae. a p
e cepa e ee 20 c.
(1)
(2)
(1)
cepecae epa
Hae y MENU pae

yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa TITLE, ae ae a c.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET,
a ae ae a c.
pa c y c, ae
ae a c.
pa y ca, ae ae
a c.
(8) pe y 6 7 ex p, a
B e epee ce c c
e ccae p.
(9) aepe ccae ccex
p epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa [SET], ae ae a c.
Tp ye cxpae a.
(10) Hae y MENU, ce
yca e.
Advanced Operations
Press MENU to display the menu settings.

Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
TITLE, then press the dial.
CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then
press the dial.
column of the desired character, then press
the dial.
desired character, then press the dial.
(8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have selected
all characters and completed the title.
(9) To finish making your own titles, turn the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then
press the dial. The title is stored in memory.
disappear.
49
MENU
Cae ccex p
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
[MENU] : END
2,3
CM SET
TITLE
READY
TITLEERASE
TITLE DSPL
CM SEARCH
TAPE TITLE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
[MENU] : END
T I TLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
T I TLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
RETURN
T I TLE SET
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
T I TLE SET
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
T I TLE SET
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
T I TLE SET
T I TLE SET
S
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
[MENU] : END
50
[MENU] : END
T I TLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
PRESET T I TLE
HELLO !
HAPPY B I RTHDAY
HAPPY HOL I DAYS
CONGRATULAT I ONS !
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDD I NG
VACAT I ON
THE END
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
[MENU] : END
Cae ccex p
To change a title you have stored
ee cxpae
a pa
In step 5, select CUSTOM1 or CUSTOM2,

depending on which title you want to change,
then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press
the dial to delete the title. The last character is
erased. Enter the new title as desired.
To enter a space
Select [Z& ?!], then select the blank space.
yae ca
Bepe [C]. ce c ye yae.
a pea
Bepe [Z& ?!], ae epe pe.
Advanced Operations
To erase a character
Select [C]. The last character is erased.
B ye 5 epe CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2

acc pa, p B xe
e, ae ae a c SEL/PUSH
EXEC. epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa [C], ae ae a c yae
pa. ce c ye yae. Bee
peye p.
cepecae epa
51
Labeling a cassette
you can label a cassette. The label can
consist of up to 10 characters and is stored
in cassette memory. When you insert a
labeled cassette and turn the power on,
the label is displayed for about
five seconds.
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert the
cassette you want to label.
,
TAPE TITLE, then press the dial. Tape title
display appears.
column of the desired character, then press
dial.
desired character, then press the dial.
(8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you complete the
label.
[SET], then press the dial.
The label is stored in memory.
52
Mappa acce
p ca acce c acce
a appy
acce. Mappa e cepa
10 c xpac a
acce. Ec B cae accey c
app e ae,
appa ye paac
cey.
(1) e c a cae
accey, py B xe
pappa.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(3) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa TAPE TITLE, ae ae a c.
c paee pa e.
pa c y c, ae
ae a c.
pa y ca, ae ae a
c.
(8) pe y 6 7 ex p, a
appa e ye aepea.
pa [SET], ae ae a c.
Mappa ye cxpaea a.
Labeling a cassette
MENU
Mappa acce
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
[MENU] : END
Advanced Operations
4,5
[ ME N U ] : E N D
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then

press the dial in step 7. The last character is
erased.
To change the label you have made

Insert the cassette to change the label, and follow
the same steps to make a new label.
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
[ ME N U ] : E N D
TAPE T I T L E
__________
TAPE T I T L E
__________
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
[ ME N U ] : E N D
[ ME N U ] : E N D
TAPE T I T L E
__________
TAPE T I T L E
M_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
[ ME N U ] : E N D
To erase the label you have made
TAPE T I T L E
__________
A B CD E
F GH I J
K L MNO
PQR S T
U VWX Y
Z& ? !
cepecae epa
CM S E T
T I TLE
T I T L EERASE
T I T L E DSP L
CM S E A R C H
TAPE T I T L E __________
ERASE A L L
RE T URN
12345
67890
. , /
[ C ]
[ SET ]
[ ME N U ] : E N D
yae e
app
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
[C], ae ae a c ye 7.
ce c ye yae.
ee e
app
Bcae accey, appy p
ex e, e e e
y, p appe acce.
53
Labeling a cassette
Mappa acce

lock
You cannot label a cassette. Slide the writeprotect tab to release the write protection.
Ec a eec acce
ycae ee a ac
If the tape has too many index signals

You may not be able to label a cassette because
the memory is full. In this case, delete data you
do not need.
If you have superimposed titles in the cassette
When the label is displayed, up to four titles also
appear.
When the ----- indicator has fewer than 10
spaces
The cassette memory is full.
The ----- indicates the number of characters
you can select for the label.
To erase a character
Press [C]. The last character is erased.
To enter a space
Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select a blank space.
B e cee appy acce.

epee eec a ac
e a.
Ec a accee aca c
ecx ca
Bep, ee app acce
ye e, cy p
epeee a. B cyae yae
eye ae.
Ec B aee p a
accee
a paaec appa, ae
paaec epex p.
Ec ap ----- ee eee
10 c
accea a epeea.
ap ----- yaae ec
c, pe pa
app.
yae ca
Hae y [C]. ce c ye
yae.
a pea
Bepe [ Z& ? ! ], ae epe pe.
54
Labeling a cassette
Erasing all the data in cassette
memory
You can erase all the data in cassette memory at
once.
In step 6, select RETURN and press the dial.
acce a cpay ya ce
ae.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(2) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
pa ERASE ALL, ae ae a c.
pa OK, ae ae a c.
a OK cec ae
EXECUTE.
pa yca EXECUTE, ae ae
a c. Ha pae ye a ap
ERASING. a ce ae yy cep,
pac ap COMPLETE.
e yae
B ye 6 epe RETURN ae a
c.
cepecae epa
To cancel deleting
Cpae cex ax
acce a
Advanced Operations

,
ERASE ALL, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK,
then press the dial. OK changes to EXECUTE.
EXECUTE, then press the dial. ERASING
flashes on the screen. When all the data is
erased, COMPLETE is displayed.
Mappa acce
55
Searching the boundaries c pa ac

of recorded tape by title a accee py
Title search
c pa
you can search for the boundaries of
recorded tape by title. Use the Remote
Commander for this operation.

a, c pa
ac a accee py. cye
y ca ypae
epa.
Before operation
Set CM SEARCH to ON in the menu settings.
(The default setting is ON.)
epe aa pa
cae CM SEARCH ee ON
ycaax e. (caa ya ON.)

(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote
Commander repeatedly, until the TITLE
SEARCH indicator appears.
The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t
no indicator
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Haae y SEARCH MODE a
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap TITLE
SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
He a
(3) Press . or > on the Remote

Commander to select the title for playback.
Your VCR automatically starts playback of
the scene having the title that you selected.
(3) Hae y . > a ye

ca ypae, pa
p cpee.
Bea aaec ae
cpeee a c pa
pa.
T I T L E S E ARCH
SEARCH
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
HE L L O !
HA P P Y NEW Y E AR !
PRE S EN T
GOOD MORN I NG
WEDD I NG
T I T L E S E A RC H
>
3
4
5
6
7
8
HA P P Y NEW Y E AR !
PRE S EN T
GOOD MORN I NG
WEDD I NG
N I GH T
BASEBA L L
[b] [a]
[a] Actual point you are trying to search for

[b] Present point on the tape
To stop searching
Press x.
56
[a] ecee ec, pe B xe

a
[b] Teyee ec a accee
ca ca
Hae y x.
Searching the boundaries of

recorded tape by title
Title search
c pa ac a accee
py
c pa
If you use a tape without cassette memory

You cannot superimpose or search a title.

a
If a tape has a blank portion between

recorded portions
The title search function may not work correctly.
Ec a aca ee ec
eacae yac
y ca pa e paa
epa.
ae pa
C. cp. 44.
Advanced Operations
To superimpose a title
See page 44.
B e ee aee c
pa.
cepecae epa
57
Searching a recording
by date Date search
c ac ae
c a
You can automatically search for the point where

the recording date recorded by the camcorder
changes and start playback from that point (Date
search). Use a tape with cassette memory for
convenience. Use the Remote Commander for
this operation.
Use this function to check where recording dates
change or to edit the tape at each recording date.
M aaec c eca,
e eec aa ac, acaa
eaep, aa cpeee c
eca (c a). yca
cye accey c acce a.
cye y ca ypae
epa.
cye y y pep, e
ec a ac, e
aa e aa ac.
Searching for the date by using

cassette memory
Before operation
You can use this function only when playing
back a tape with cassette memory.
(The default setting is ON).
Commander repeatedly, until the DATE
no indicator
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander
to select the date for playback.
Your VCR automatically starts playback at the
beginning of the selected date.
c a c
acce a
epe aa pa
B ee ca y y
p cpee acce c acce
a.
cae CM SEARCH ee ON
ycaax e. (caa ya ON).
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
ye ca ypae, a e
c ap DATE SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
He a
(3) Hae y . > a ye
ca ypae, pa
ay cpee.
Bea aaec ae
cpeee c pa a.
58

Date search
DA T E S E ARCH
SEARCH
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 0 2
SEP / 6 / 0 2
DEC / 2 4 / 0 2
J AN / 1 / 0 3
F EB / 1 1 / 0 3
APR / 2 9 / 0 3
Advanced Operations
c ac ae
c a
DA T E S E ARCH
>
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 0 2
SEP / 6 / 0 2
DEC / 2 4 / 0 2
J AN / 1 / 0 3
F EB / 1 1 / 0 3
APR / 2 9 / 0 3
[b] [a]
To stop searching
Press x.
Notes
The data search does not work for tapes with
date data recorded by your VCR.
The date search works only for tapes recorded
with the date and time set.
If one days recording is less than two minutes,
your VCR may not accurately find the point
where the recording date changes.
Note (GV-D1000E only)
The date indicator displays 5/ 9/02
recorded portions
The date search function may not work correctly.
Cassette memory
The tape cassette memory can hold the data for
six recording date. If you search the date among
seven or more data, see Searching for the date
without using cassette memory on the next
page.

a
ca ca
Hae y x.
pea
y ca ax e paae
acce, a px ae ae
aca ea.
c a paae acce,
acax c yca a pee.
Ec pec ac
ccae eee yx y,
ea e e a ec,
e eec aa.
cepecae epa

peae ( e GV-D1000E)
ap a paae 5/ 9/02
Ec a aca ee ec
eacae yac
y ca a e paa
epa.
accea a
accea a acce e cxpa
ae ec a ac. Ec
ec c a ac p a
ce ee a, c. pae c a e
ca acce a a ceye
cpae.
59

Date search
c ac ae
c a
Searching for the date without

using cassette memory
c a e ca
acce a

,
CM SEARCH to OFF, then press the dial.
Commander repeatedly until the DATE
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
no indicator T PHOTO SCAN
(6) Press . on the Remote Commander to
search for the previous date or press > on
the Remote Commander to search for the
next date. Your VCR automatically starts
playback at the point where the date changes.
Each time you press . or >, your VCR
searches for the previous or next date.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
yca CM SEARCH ee OFF,
ae ae a c.
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap DATE
SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
He a T PHOTO SCAN
(6) Hae y . a ye
ca ypae ca
peye a ae y >
a ye ca ypae
ca ceye a. Bea
aaec ae cpeee
ece, e aa eec. p
a aa . >
ea e c
peye ceye a.
To stop searching
Press x.
ca ca
Hae y x.
60
c
c/
capae
You can search for a still image you have

recorded on a tape recorded by the camcorder
(photo search).
Use a tape with cassette memory for
convenience.
You can also search for still images one after
another and display each image for
five seconds automatically regardless of cassette
memory (photo scan). Use the Remote
Commander for these operations.
Use this function to check or edit still images.
M c e
pae, aca a accee c
eaep (c).
yca cye accey c acce
a.
M ae c ex
pae a py paa
ae paee eee
cey aaec eac
acce a (capae).
x epa cye y
ca ypae.
cye y y pep
aa ex pae.
Searching for a photo by using

cassette memory
Before operation
You can use this function only when playing
back a tape with cassette memory.
(The default setting is ON.)
Commander repeatedly, until the PHOTO
no indicator
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander
to select the date for playback. Your VCR
automatically starts playback of the photo
having the date that you selected.
c c
acce a
epe aa pa
M ca y y p
cpee acce c acce
a.
cae CM SEARCH ee ON
ycaax e. (caa ya ON.)
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
ye ca ypae, a e
c ap PHOTO SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
He a

Photo search/
Photo scan
(3) Hae y . > a ye

ca ypae, pa
ay cpee.
Bea aaec ae
cpeee c pa a.
61

Photo search/Photo scan
c
c/capae
PHOTO S E ARCH
SEARCH
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 0 2 5 : 3 0 P M
SEP / 6 / 0 2 8 : 5 0 A M
DEC / 2 4 / 0 2 1 0 : 3 0 A M
J AN / 1 / 0 3 1 1 : 2 5 P M
F EB / 1 1 / 0 3 4 : 1 1 P M
APR / 2 9 / 0 3 1 : 4 5 P M
P HO T O S E A RCH
>
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 0 2 5 : 3 0 P M
SEP / 6 / 0 2 8 : 5 0 A M
DEC / 2 4 / 0 2 1 0 : 3 0 A M
J AN / 1 / 0 3 1 1 : 2 5 P M
F EB / 1 1 / 0 3 4 : 1 1 P M
APR / 2 9 / 0 3 1 : 4 5 P M
[b] [a]

To stop searching
Press x.
The indicator displays 5/ 9/02 17:30

a
ca ca
Hae y x.
peae ( e GV-D1000E)
ap a paae 5/ 9/02 17:30
Searching for a photo without

using cassette memory
c e ca
acce a

,
CM SEARCH to OFF, then press the dial.
Commander repeatedly until the PHOTO
Commander to select the photo for playback.
Each time you press . or >, your VCR
searches for the previous or next photo.
Your VCR automatically starts playback of
the photo.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
yca CM SEARCH ee OFF,
ae ae a c.
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap PHOTO
SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
He a T PHOTO SCAN
(6) Hae y . > a ye
ca ypae, pa
cpee. p a
aa . >
ea e c
peye ceye .
Bea aaec ae
cpeee .
To stop searching
Press x.
ca ca
62
Hae y x.

Photo search/Photo scan
Scanning photo
c
c/capae
Capae
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap PHOTO
SCAN.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
He a T PHOTO SCAN
(3) Hae y . > a ye
ca ypae.
ae ye aaec
paac eee pe
cey.
SEARCH
MODE
PHOTO 0 0
SCAN
To stop scanning
ca capa
Press x.
Hae y x.

recorded portions
The photo search/photo scan function may not
work correctly.
Ec a aca ee ec
eacae yac
The available number of photos that can be

searched using the cassette memory
The available number is up to 12 photos.
However, you can search 13 photos or more
using the scanning photo function.
ec pa ca c
acce a
Macae ec - 12 pa.
Oa c 13 ee
c y capa.
cepecae epa
Advanced Operations

Commander repeatedly until the PHOTO
SCAN indicator appears.
Commander.
Each photo is played back for about five
seconds automatically.
y ca/capa e
paa epa.
63
pae pax
To display the screen
indicators Display function ap y a
When you play back tapes recorded by your
VCR, you can check the recording date/time.
Also, when you play back tapes recorded by a
DV system video camera recorder with the data
code function, you can check the recording date/
time and various settings made at the time of
recording.
p cpee acce, acax c

eaa,
pep ay/pe ac.
pe , p cpee acce,
acax c eaep cce
DV c ye a ax, pep
ay/pe ac, a ae pye yca,
ee pe ac.
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DATA CODE

Press DISPLAY. The indicators appear on the
screen. To make the indicators disappear, press
DISPLAY again.
pae pax
ap
Hae y DISPLAY. Ha pae c
ap. ap
ce, ae y DISPLAY ee pa.
[c]
[a]
[b]
[d]
1 2 0 min
0 : 00 : 23:01
1 2 min
[e]
[f]
[a] Cassette memory

[b] Remaining battery time
[c] Recording mode
[d] Video control mode
[e] Tape counter/Time code
[f] Remaining tape
64
[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]
[f]
accea a
Ocaeec pe pa aape
Pe ac
Pe ypae epaee
Ce e/ pee
Ocaac ea

Display function
pae pax
ap y a
To display the date/time and

various settings
pae a/pee
pax yca
1 Set the POWER switch to ON, then play

back a tape.
2 Press DATA CODE on the Remote
Commander.
The display changes as follows:
date/time t various settings (SteadyShot,
exposure, white balance, gain, shutter speed,
aperture value) t no indicator
1 cae epeae POWER

ee ON, ae ae
cpeee acce.
2 Hae y DATA CODE a ye
ca ypae.
a ye ec cey
pa:
aa/pe t pae yca (yca
cea, c, aac e, ycee,
cpc apa, ea apa) t e
a
Date/time/
aa/pe
Various settings/
Pae yca
[a]
[b]
[c]
JUL 4 2002
12:05:56 AM
AUTO
50 AWB
F1.8
9dB
cepecae epa
cye y ca
ypae epa.
ea aaec
acae a accee e pae,
ae ac (ay/pe pae
yca p ac) ( ax).
Advanced Operations
Use the Remote Commander for this

operation
Your VCR automatically records not only images
on the tape but also the recording data (date/
time or various settings when recorded) (Data
code).
[d]
[e]
[f]
[a] SteadyShot OFF

[b]Exposure mode
[c] White balance
[d]Gain
[e] Shutter speed
[f] Aperture value
Not to display various settings
Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings
(p. 112).
The display changes as follows when you press
DATA CODE on the Remote Commander: date/
time y no indicator
[a]ap e yc ce
(SteadyShot OFF)
[b] Pe c
[c] aac e
[d] cee
[e] Cpc apa
[f] Bea apa
, e paac pae
yca
cae DATA CODE ee DATE
ycaax e (cp. 117).
p aa DATA CODE a ye
ca ypae a ye
ec cey pa: aa/pe y
e a
65

Display function
pae pax
ap y a

peae ( e GV-D1000E)
Date/time
You can check the date indicator in record mode.
aa/pe
ap a pep pee
ac.
Various settings
Various settings are the camcorders information
when you have recorded.
When you use the data code function, bars
(-- -- --) appear if:
A blank portion of the tape is being played
back.
The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or
noise.
The tape was recorded by a camcorder without
the date and time set.
Data code
When you connect your VCR to the TV, the data
code appears on the TV screen.
Remaining battery time indicator during
playback
The indicator indicates the approximate
continuous playback time. The indicator may not
be correct, depending on the conditions in which
you are playing back. When you close the LCD
panel and open it again, it takes about one
minute for the correct remaining battery time to
be displayed.
66
ap paae 4 7 2002.
Pae yca
Pae yca paa pa
eaep a e e ac.
p ca y a ax
c c (-- -- --), ec:
Bcpc eaca yac
e.
ea e aec ca -a
pee ex.
ac a ey a ea
eaep e yca a pee.
ax
Ec ea ce
eepy, ax ye paac a
pae eepa.
ap caec pee pa
aape a pe
cpee
ap paae pee pe
epep cpee. ap
e e acc yc,
px ec cpeee. Ec
ap ae p ee ca,
pe epe yy c
a, paaa e caeec
pe pa aape a.
Editing
Ma
Dubbing a tape
epeac acce
cae cee
ae ay/e
You can dub or edit on another VCR connected

to your VCR using your VCR as a player.
Connect your VCR to the other (recording) VCR
using the A/V connecting cable supplied with
your VCR.
Ma

the other (recording) VCR, and insert the
recorded tape into your (playback) VCR.
(2) Set the input selector on the other (recording)
VCR to LINE. Connect the A/V connecting
cable to AUDIO/VIDEO jack.
Refer to the operating instructions of the other
(recording) VCR.
(4) Press H PLAY to play back the recorded
tape on your (playback) VCR.
(5) Start recording on the other (recording) VCR.
For details, refer to the operating instructions
of the other (recording) VCR.
epe aa pa
cae apaep DISPLAY ee
LCD ycaax e. (caa
ya - LCD.)
Haae ceye
e ap, e
ae a pyey ey:
DISPLAY
DATA CODE a ye ca
ypae
SEARCH MODE a ye ca
ypae
Editing
Before operation
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The
default setting is LCD.)
Press the following buttons to make the
indicator disappear so that they will not be
superimposed on the edited tape:
DISPLAY
DATA CODE on the Remote Commander
SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander
B ee epeac a a
py eae, cee
Baey eay, cyey
aece ppae.
cee c ea pyy
(acaey) eay c
cee ae ay/e, p
x e ca eaa.
(1) e c a cae
cy accey ( accey, a py B
xe ac) py
(aca) ea, cae
ae acay accey c
(cp) ea.
(2) cae ceep x caa a
py (acae) eae
ee LINE. cee
cee ae ay/e
ey AUDIO/VIDEO.
Opaec cpy cyaa
py (acae) eaa.
(3) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(4) Hae y H PLAY, aa
cpeee aca e a
(cpe) eae.
(5) Hae ac a py (acae)
eae. pe cee c.
cpy cyaa py
(acae) eaa.

S VIDEO OUT
IN
S VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO OUT

Cee ae ay/
: Signal flow/
pxee caa e (paaec)
67
Dubbing a tape
epeac acce
When you have finished dubbing a

tape
a epeac acce aea
Press x on both the other (recording) VCR and

your (playback) VCR.
You can edit on VCRs that support the
following systems:
8 mm,
Hi8,
VHS,
S-VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHSC, Betamax,
ED Betamax,
mini DV,
DV, or
Digital8
If your VCR is a monaural type
cable to the video input jack and the white or the
red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or
the TV. When the white plug is connected, the
left channel audio is output, and when the red
plug is connected, the right channel audio is
output.
If the other (recording) VCR has an S video
jack
cable.
jacks of both your (playback) VCR and the other
(recording) VCR.
format pictures.
68
Hae y x a a py
(acae), a a ce
(cpe) eae.
Ma a
eaax, pe
epa ceye cce:
8 ,
Hi8,
VHS,
S-VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHSC, Betamax,
ED Betamax,
mini DV,
DV
Digital8
Ec Ba ea
ec a
cee e eep
cee ae ay/e
xy ey ecaa, a e
pac eep xy ey
aycaa a eae
eepe. p cee e
eepa y ye aac a e
aa, a p cee pac - a
pa.
Ec a py (acae)
eae eec e S video
paee e cpee
ee cep p ca ae
S video (ppeaec e).
p a cee e ac
a e eep (e)
cee ae ay/e.
e) ea S video a Bae
(cpe) py (acae)
eaax.
ceee e y
caecee paee paa
DV.

cable)
cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)
pc cee ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) (ppeaec
e) ey DV Bae
eaa ey DV aapa
DV. p ca p
cee e- ayca
epeac p e
ceye caece
aa. B e ee epeaca
p, ap a cee
cepae acce a, y a
ec pae Memory Stick.
(1) e c a cae
cy accey ( accey, a py
B xe ac) py
(aca) ea,
cae ae acay accey c
(cp) ea.
(2) cae ceep x caa a
py (acae)
eae ee x
caa DV, ec a eec a
eae. pe cee
c. cpy cyaa py
(acae) eaa.
(3) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(4) Hae y H PLAY, aa
cpeee aca e a
(cpe) eae.
(5) Hae ac a py
(acae) eae.
pe cee c. cpy
cyaa py (acae)
eaa.
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting

cable) (optional) to the DV jack of your VCR
and to DV jack of the DV products. With digitalto-digital connection, video and audio signals are
transmitted in digital form for high-quality
editing. You cannot dub the titles, display
indicators or the contents of cassette memory or
letters on the Memory Stick index screen.
the other (recording) VCR, and insert the
recorded tape into your (playback) VCR.
(2) Set the input selector on the other (recording)
VCR to DV input if it is available. For details,
refer to the operating instructions of the other
(recording) VCR.
(4) Press H PLAY to play back the recorded
tape on your (playback) VCR.
(5) Start recording on the other (recording) VCR.
For details, refer to the operating instructions
of the other (recording) VCR.
Ma
epeac acce
Editing
Dubbing a tape
DV
DV
DV
: Signal flow/
pxee
caa
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)/

ae i.LINK (cee ae DV) (ppeaec
e)
When you have finished dubbing a

tape
Press x on both the other (recording) VCR and
a epeac acce aea

Hae y x a a py
(acae), a a ce
(cpe) eae.
69
Dubbing a tape
epeac acce
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK

cable (DV connecting cable).
See page 197 for more information about i.LINK.
B ee ce
ea c ae
i.LINK (cee ae DV).
pe cee i.LINK c. a cp. 197.
Pictures processed by the picture effect, the

digital effect or PB ZOOM function
Pictures processed by the picture effect, the
digital effect or PB ZOOM function are not
output through the DV jack.
If you record a playback pause picture with
the DV jack
The recorded picture will be distorted. Also,
when you play back the recorded pictures on
other video equipment, the picture may jitter.
70
pae, eee c
y e pae,
px e PB ZOOM
pae, eee c
y e pae, px
e PB ZOOM, e c epe
e DV.
p ac e pae c
ea DV
acaee paee cae xye.
pe , p cpee
aca pae a py
eaapaype e pa.
Dubbing only desired

scenes Digital program
editing (on tapes)
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for

editing onto a tape without operating the other
(recording) VCR.
Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up
to 20 programs.
Your (playback) VCR can dub on Memory
Sticks. See page 135 for more information.
M ypa a accee pae

aa (ppa) e
py (acae)
eaa.
pa apa. M
cca e ee 20 ppa.
Ba (cp) ea
e epeac a Memory
Stick. pe cee c. a cp. 135.
Editing
Unwanted scene/
Hey
Unwanted scene/
Hey
Ma
Switch the order/

e p
Before operating Digital program

editing on tapes
epe ee p
aa ppa a acceax
Step 1 Connecting the other (recording) VCR

(p. 72).
Step 2 Setting the other (recording) VCR for
operation (p. 72, 79).
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronicity of the other
(recording) VCR (p. 81).
When you dub using the same (recording) VCR
again, you can skip steps 2 and 3.
a 1 ee py
(acae) eaa
(cp. 72).
a 2 Hacpa py (acae)
eaa pa (cp.
72, 79).
a 3 Peypa cxpc py
(acae) eaa
(cp. 81).
Ec aee epeac ec c
e (acae)
eaa, a 2 3 pyc.
Using the Digital program editing

function
Operation 1 Making the program (p. 83).
Operation 2 Performing a Digital program
editing (dubbing a tape) (p. 86).
cae y p
aa ppae
Oepa 1 Cae ppa (cp. 83).
Oepa 2 Bee p aa
ppa (epeac acce)
(cp. 86).
71
Dubbing only desired scenes

Digital program editing (on
tapes)
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
Notes
When you connect with the i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable), you may not be able to
perform the dubbing function correctly,
depending on the other (recording) VCR.
Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of
When editing digital video on tapes, the
operation signals cannot be sent with LANC.
pea
p e c ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) y
epeac e c
epa acc py
(acae) eaa.
B ycaax e ce
(cpe) eaa
ycae CONTROL ee IR.
p ae p e a acceax
ca ypae e
epeca epe LANC.
Step 1: Connecting the other

(recording) VCR
You can connect either the A/V connecting cable
or the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).
When you use the A/V connecting cable, connect
the devices as illustrated on page 67.
When you use the i.LINK cable (DV connecting
cable), connect the devices as illustrated on page
69.
If you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable)
With digital-to-digital connection, video and
audio signals are transmitted in digital form for
high-quality editing.
Step 2: Setting the other

(recording) VCR for operation
- Using the A/V connecting cable
To edit using the other (recording) VCR, send the
control signal by infrared ray to the remote
sensor on the other (recording) VCR.
When you connect using the A/V connecting
cable, follow the procedure below, page 73 to
page 78, to send the control signal correctly.
a 1: ee py
(acae)
eaa
M cee ae
ay/e ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV).
p ca cee ae
ay/e cee ycpca, a
aa a cp. 67.
p ca ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) cee
ycpca, a aa a cp. 69.
Ec ee pc c
ae i.LINK (cee
ae DV)
p ca p cee
e- ayca epeac
p e ceye
caece aa.
a 2: Hacpa py
(acae)
eaa pa
- cae
cee ae ay/
e
e aa c cae
py (acae) eaa
ca -ca ypae a
e a ca ypae.
p cee c
cee ae ay/e
e cay e peypy a
cp. 73 - 78, pa ca
ca ypae.
72
Setting the IR SETUP code
caa a IR SETUP
(1) Set the POWER switch to ON on your

(playback) VCR.
(2) Turn the power of the other (recording) VCR
on, then set the input selector to LINE.
When you connect a digital video camera
recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR/
VTR.
VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
TAPE, then press the dial.
EDIT SET, then press the dial.
CONTROL, then press the dial.
(9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR,
(10) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR
SETUP, then press the dial.
IR SETUP code of the other (recording) VCR
(p. 75, 76), then press the dial.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON a (cpe)
eae.
(2) Be ae py
(acae) eaa
ycae ceep x caa
ee LINE.
p cee p
eaep ycae ee
epeae POWER ee VCR/
VTR.
(3) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
, ae ae a c.
pa
pa VIDEO EDIT, ae ae a
c.
pa yca TAPE, a ae
ae a c.
pa EDIT SET, a ae ae a
c.
pa CONTROL, a ae ae a
c.
pa IR, a ae ae a c.
pa IR SETUP, a ae ae a
c.
(11) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC,
pa IR SETUP py
(acae) eaa
(cp. 75, 76), ae ae a c.
Ma
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
Editing

tapes)
73

tapes)
MENU
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT READY
RETURN
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
TAPE
RETURN
MEMORY
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
TOT A L
SCENE
[MENU] : END
[ ME NU ] : E ND
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
E D I T SET
0:0 8:5 5:0 6

IN
0:0 0:0 0:0 0

0
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
[ ME NU ] : E ND
V I D EO E D I T
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6

V I D EO E D I T
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
i . L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
V I D EO E D I T
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
V I D EO E D I T
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP 2
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
TOT A L
SCENE
8-9
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
E D I T SET
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
TAPE
MEMORY
IR
0:0 0:0 0:0 0

0
10-11
V I D EO E D I T
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
74
0:0 8:5 5:0 6

tapes)
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
About the IR SETUP code

The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of
your VCR. Be sure to set the correct code,
depending on the other (recording) VCR. The
default setting is code number 3.
pa e IR SETUP
IR SETUP cepc a
eaa. cae pa
, cecy pyy
(acaey) eay.
ca ya ec
ep 3.
GV-D1000
IR SETUP code/
IR SETUP
Brand/
Sony
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
IR SETUP code/
IR SETUP
23, 32, 80
NEC
21, 33, 35
Aiwa
47, 54 ,80
Olympic
77, 78
Akai
49, 51
Optimus
22
Audio Dynamic
21, 35
Orion
60
Bell&Howell (M. Wards)

36
Panasonic
16, 17, 77, 78
Pentax
8, 42
Broksonic
21, 70, 82
Philco
26, 70, 77, 78
Canon
77, 78
Philips
47, 77, 78, 83
Citizen
47
Pioneer
78
Craig
47, 73
Quasar
6, 16, 17, 77, 78
Curtis Mathis
8, 77, 80
RCA/PROSCAN
7, 8, 16, 40, 41, 42, 77, 78, 83, 101
Daewoo
26, 40, 77
Realistic
22, 36, 37, 77, 80, 88
DBX
21, 33, 35
Sansui
21
Dimensia
Singer
73
Emerson
26, 48, 59, 70, 80, 81, 82
Samsung
24, 24*, 32, 32*, 41, 94, 94*
Fisher
36, 37, 44, 45
Sanyo
26, 36, 37, 47
Funai
80
Scott
22, 23, 24, 28, 32, 37, 40, 41
General Electric
8, 32*, 77, 94*, 101
Sharp
88, 89
Goldstar/LG
47
Shintom
73
GO VIDEO
71
Hitachi
8, 42, 78
Signature 2000 (M. Wards)

80, 89
HQ
40
Sylvania
77, 78, 80, 83
Instant Replay
77, 78
Symphonic
80
JC Penny
8, 21, 33, 35, 36, 42, 77
Tashiro
47
JVC
12, 13, 14, 21, 33, 35
Tatung
21, 33, 35
Kenwood
21, 33, 35, 47
Teac
21, 33, 35, 80
LXI (Sears)
36, 37, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 80
Technics
77, 78
Magnavox
17, 77, 78, 83
Toshiba
7, 40, 49
Marantz
21, 33, 35
Wards
37, 47, 88, 89, 95
Marta
47
Yamaha
21, 33, 35, 36
Memorex
37, 77
Zenith
95
Minolta
8, 42
Mitsubishi/MGA
22, 23, 24, 28, 29
Ma
Multitech
Admiral (M. Wards) 89
Editing
Brand/
75

tapes)
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
GV-D1000E
Brand/
Sony
Aiwa
Akai
Alba
Amstrad
Baird
Blaupunkt
Bush
CGM
Clatronic
Daewoo
Ferguson
Fisher
Funai
Goldstar
Goodmans
Grundig
Hitachi
ITT/Nokia
JVC
Kendo
Loewe
Luxor
Mark
Matsui
Mitsubishi
IR SETUP code/
IR SETUP
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
47, 53, 54
50, 62, 74
73
73
30, 36
11, 83
74
36, 47, 83
73
26
76, 83
73
80
47
26, 84
9, 83
42, 56
36
11, 12, 15, 21
47
16, 47, 84
89
26*
47, 58*, 60
28, 29
Brand/
Nokia
Nokia Oceanic
Nordmende
Okano
Orion
Panasonic
Philips
Phonola
Roadstar
SABA
Salora
Samsung
Sanyo
Schneider
SEG
Seleco
Sharp
Siemens
Tandberg
Telefunken
Thomson
Thorn
Toshiba
Universum
W.W. House
Watoson
IR SETUP code/
IR SETUP
36, 89
89
76
60, 62, 63
58*, 70
16, 78
83, 84, 86
83, 84
47
21, 76, 91
89
22, 32, 52, 93, 94
36
10, 83, 84
73
47, 74
89
10, 36
26
91, 92
76, 100
36, 47
40, 93
47, 70, 84 ,92
47
58, 83
* TV/VCR component/
/
Note on the IR SETUP code
Digital program editing is not possible if the VCR
does not support IR SETUP codes.
76
IR SETUP

IR SETUP,
.
Setting the modes to cancel the

recording pause on the other
(recording) VCR
caa pe e
ay p ac a py
(acae) eae

PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.
mode to cancel recording pause on the other
(recording) VCR, then press the dial.
Refer to the operating instructions of the
other (recording) VCR.

pa PAUSEMODE, a ae ae a
c.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC,
pa pe e ay p
ac a py (acae)
eae, a ae ae a
c.
Opaec cpy
cyaa py (acae)
eaa.
The buttons to cancel recording pause on the

other (recording) VCR
Select the buttons when you cancel recording
pause and start recording on the other
(recording) VCR.
The buttons vary depending on the other
(recording) VCR. To cancel recording pause:
Select PAUSE if the button to cancel
recording pause is X.
Select REC if the button to cancel recording
pause is z.
Select PB if the button to cancel recording
pause is N.
VIDEO EDIT
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
REC
I R TEST
PB
RETURN
[MENU] : END
Ma
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
Editing

tapes)
0:0 8:5 5:0 6

VIDEO EDIT
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
e ay p ac a
py (acae)
eae
Bepe p ee ay p
ac ae ac a py
(acae) eae.
y pa acc
e (acae) eaa.
e ay p ac:
Bepe PAUSE, ec
e ay p ac ec X.
Bepe REC, ec e
ay p ac ec z.
Bepe PB, ec e
ay p ac ec N.
77

tapes)
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
Locate the infrared rays emitter of

your (playback) VCR to face it
towards the remote sensor of the
other (recording) VCR.
papac yae
(cpe) eaa
ex apa a a
ca ypae py
(acae) eaa.
Set the devices more than 30 cm (12 in.) apart,

and remove any obstacles between the devices.
Infrared rays emitter (back side)/
yae papacx ye
(a ae)
cae ycpca a pacc ee

30 c py pya ycpae e
pec ey .
Other (recording) VCR/
py (aca)
ea
Remote sensor/a
ca ypae
Confirming the other (recording) VCR

operation
pepa pa py
(acae) eaa
(1) Insert a recordable tape into the other

(recording) VCR, then set to recording pause.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR
TEST, then press the dial.
If the other (recording) VCR starts recording,
the setting is correct.
When finished, the indicator changes to
COMPLETE.
(1) Bcae accey ac py

(aca) ea, ae
ycae pe ay ac.
pa IR TEST, a ae ae a
c.
pa yca EXECUTE, ae
ae a c.
Ec py (aca)
ea p ac,
aae pay acpy.
a ap ec a
COMPLETE.
3
78
VIDEO EDI T
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
ENGAGE
REC PAUSE
RETURN
EXECUTE
VIDEO EDI T
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
COMPLETE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
If the other (recording) VCR does not operate

correctly
After checking the code in About the IR
SETUP code, set the IR SETUP or the
PAUSEMODE again.
Place your (play back) VCR at least 30 cm (12
in.) away from the other (recording) VCR.
Refer to the operating instructions of the other
(recording) VCR.
Ec py (aca)
ea paae epa
ce pep a paee
pa e IR SETUP ca
ycae IR SETUP PAUSEMODE.
cae c (cp)
ea a pacc e eee
30 c py (acae)
eaa.
Opaec cpy cyaa
py (acae)
eaa.
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV

connecting cable) (optional), follow the
procedures below.
(playback) VCR .
(2) Turn the power of the other (recording) VCR
on, then set the input selector to DV input.
When you connect a digital video camera
recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR/VTR.
,
EDIT SET, then press the dial.
CONTROL, then press the dial.
i.LINK, then press the dial.
a 2: Hacpa py
(acae)
eaa pa
- cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)
Ma
Step 2: Setting the other

(recording) VCR for operation
- Using the i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable)
Editing

tapes)
p cee c ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) (ppeaec
e) e cae e
peyp.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON a
(cpe) eae.
(2) Be ae py
(acae) eaa
ycae ceep x caa
ee DV.
p cee p
eaep ycae ee
epeae POWER ee
VCR/VTR.
(3) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
c.
pa yca TAPE, a ae ae
a c.
pa EDIT SET, a ae ae a
c.
pa CONTROL, a ae ae a
c.
pa i.LINK, a ae ae a c.
79
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)

tapes)
MENU
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT READY
RETURN
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
TAPE
RETURN
MEMORY
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
TOT A L
SCENE
[MENU] : END
[ ME NU ] : E ND
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
E D I T SET
When you connect using the i.LINK (DV

connecting cable)
You cannot dub titles or display indicators.
80
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
0:0 8:5 5:0 6

IN
0:0 0:0 0:0 0

0
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
[ ME NU ] : E ND
V I D EO E D I T
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6

V I D EO E D I T
ED I T SET
IR
CONTROL
i . L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6

V I D EO E D I T
ED I T SET
CONTROL
i .L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
TOT A L
SCENE
8-9
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
E D I T SET
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
TAPE
MEMORY
IR
0:0 0:0 0:0 0

0
p cee c ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)
Tp ap a cee
epeaca e.

tapes)
Step 3: Adjusting the
synchronicity of the other
(recording) VCR
You can adjust the synchronicity of your
(playback) VCR and the other (recording) VCR.
First, eject the tape from your (playback) VCR.
Have a pen and paper ready for notes.
(1)
a 3: Peypa
cxpc py
(acae)
eaa
M peypa cxpc
(cpe) py
(acae) eaa.
Caaa ee accey
(cpe) eaa.
pe pyy yay ae.
(1)
Ma
cae epeae POWER

ee ON a ce
(cpe) eae.
(2) Bcae cy accey ( accey, a
py y ac)
py (aca) ea,
ae ycae pe ay ac.
Ec i.LINK paec CONTROL, e
y ycaaa pe ay p
ac.
pa ADJ TEST, a ae ae a c.
pa yca EXECUTE, ae
ae a c.
Ha paee ayc
e IN OUT, x
pacca ce ae
peyp cxpc.
Ha pae ae a ap
EXECUTING. a ap
ec a COMPLETE.
(5) epeae accey py
(acae) eae a
aa, ae e aeee
cpeee.
Opae ae a aae
ce aee a e IN
ee ce aee a
e OUT.
(6) Paccae cpeee aee cex
aax cx ae a
e IN, a ae cpeee aee cex
ex cx ae a
e OUT.
pa CUT-IN, a ae ae a c.
pa cpee c ae IN,
ae ae a c.
Paccae aae ee
ac ycae.
pa CUT-OUT, a ae ae a
c.
pa cpee c ae
OUT, ae ae a c.
Paccae ee ee
ac ycae.
pa RETURN, a ae ae a c.
Editing
Set the POWER switch to ON on your

(playback) VCR.
(2) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to
record over) into the other (recording) VCR,
then set to recording pause.
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, you
do not need to set to recording pause.
ADJ TEST, then press the dial.
IN and OUT are recorded on the image five
times each to calculate the numerical values
for adjusting the synchronicity.
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the
screen. When finished, the indicator
changes to COMPLETE.
(5) Rewind the tape in the other (recording)
VCR, then start slow playback.
Take a note of the opening numerical value
of each IN and the closing numerical value
of each OUT.
(6) Calculate the average of all the opening
numerical values of each IN, and the
average of all the closing numerical values
of each OUT.
CUT-IN, then press the dial.
average numerical value of IN, then press
the dial.
The calculated start position for recording is
set.
CUT-OUT, then press the dial.
average numerical value of OUT, then press
the dial.
The calculated stop position for recording is
set.
RETURN, then press the dial.
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
81
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)

tapes)
7
3,4
V I DEO ED I T
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
ED I T SET
CONTROL
RETURN
ADJ TEST
EXECUTE
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
ENGAGE
I R SETUP
REC PAUSE
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETUN
V I DEO ED I T
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
[MENU] : END
ED I T SET
CONTROL
EXECUT I NG
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
No .5
CUT -OUT
IN
I R SETUP
-60
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETUN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
V I DEO ED I T
ED I T SET
CONTROL
COMPLETE
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
V I DEO ED I T
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
Notes
When you complete step 3, the image to adjust
the synchronicity is recorded for about 50
seconds.
If you start recording from the very beginning
of the tape, the first few seconds of the tape
may not record properly. Be sure to allow about
10 seconds lead before starting recording.
When the recording unit cannot be operated
properly by the i.LINK cable (DV connecting
cable), leave the connection as it is, and make
the A/V connecting cable settings (p. 72). Video
and audio are sent as digital signals.
82
V I DEO ED I T
ED I T SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END
pea
ce aepe ya 3 paee
acp cxpc acaec
eee pep 50 cey.
Ec ac aaec c ca aaa
acce, epe ec cey a
ey e acac paee
eyepe aeca. pee
e aa ac, ex pyc
pe 10 cey a ee.
Ec acaee ycpc e
paae pa c aee
i.LINK (cee aee DV), e
ee ceee e acp
cee ae ay/e
(cp. 72). Be- ayca
epeac p pe.

tapes)
Operation 1: Making the
program
Oepa 1: Cae
ppa
(1)
Ma
e c a
cae accey, c p ex
cea ac, c
(cp) ea, a
accey ac - py
(aca) ea.
(2) Hae y MENU
pae yca e.
pa
, ae ae a c.
c.
pa yca TAPE, a ae
ae a c.
(6) C ypae e
ae aa ep a,
p B xe ca, ae
ae X, a pe
pca cpeee.
Ty acpy
ap c c
C.
pa yca MARK, ae ae
a c, ae y MARK a
ye ca ypae.
Mec aaa IN ep ppa
ye ycae, e epxe
apa e ppa ec
a ce-y.
(8) C ypae e
ae e ep a, p
B xe ca, ae ae
y X, a pe
pca cpeee.
pa yca MARK, ae ae
a c, ae y MARK a
ye ca ypae.
Mec a OUT ep
ppa ye ycae, e
e apa e ppa
ec a ce-y.
(10) pe y c 6 9, ae
aae ppay.
ce aepe ppapa
e apa e ppa
eec a ce-y.
M cca e ee 20 ppa.
Editing
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert the

tape for playback into your (playback)
VCR, and insert a tape for recording into
the other (recording) VCR.
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene
you want to insert using the video
operation buttons, then press X to suspend
playback momentarily.
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time
with c
or C.
MARK, then press the dial, or press MARK
on the Remote Commander.
The IN point of the first program is set, and
the top part of the program mark changes
to light blue.
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you
want to insert using the video operation
buttons, then press X to suspend playback
momentarily.
The OUT point of the first program is set,
then the bottom part of the program mark
changes to light blue.
(10) Repeat steps 6 to 9, then set program.
When the program is set, the program mark
You can set a maximum of 20 programs.
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
83
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)

tapes)
6,8
PAUSE
PLAY
MENU
REW
FF
STOP
7
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
ED I T / SE T
84
9
0:0 8:5 5:0 6
1 OU T
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
ED I T / SE T
10
0:0 9:0 7:0 6
2 IN
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
ED I T / SE T
0:1 0:0 1:2 3

4 IN
T O T A L 0:0 0:0 0:0 0

SCENE 0
T O T A L 0:0 0:1 2:0 0

SCENE 1
T O T A L 0:0 0:4 7:1 2

SCENE 3
[ ME NU ] : E ND
[ ME NU ] : E ND
[ ME NU ] : E ND
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
Erasing the program you have set
aee aa ppa
Erase OUT first and then IN from the last

program.
Caaa yae ey OUT, a ae ey

IN cee ppa.

UNDO, then press the dial.
The last set program mark flashes, then the
setting is canceled.

pa UNDO, a ae ae a c.
pa yca EXECUTE, ae
ae a c.
ap cee ycae
ppa ae a, ae
yca yy ee.
To cancel erasing
Select RETURN in step 2, then press the dial.
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings.

ERASE ALL, then press the dial.
All the program marks flash, then the
settings are canceled.
To cancel erasing all programs
Select RETURN in step 4, then press the dial.
To cancel a program you have set
Press MENU.
The program is stored in memory until the tape
is ejected.
Note
You cannot operate recording during Digital
program editing.
On a blank portion of the tape
You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portion of
the tape.
If there is a blank portion between IN and
OUT on the tape
The total time code may not be displayed
correctly.
e yae
Bepe RETURN ye 2, ae
ae a c.
Ma
Erasing all programs
Editing

tapes)
aee cex ppa

(1) Bepe VIDEO EDIT ycaax e.
pa yca TAPE, a ae ae
a c.
pa ERASE ALL, a ae ae a
c.
pa yca EXECUTE, ae
ae a c.
ap cex ppa ay
a, ae yca yy ee.
e yae cex
appapax
Bepe RETURN ye 4, ae
ae a c.
e ycae ppa
Hae y MENU.
ppaa xpac a ea
ee acce.
peae
He ac pe
p aa ppa.
Ha eaca yace e
Me aaa IN a OUT e
yca a eaca ac acce.
Ec a ee ec eaca yac
ey ea IN OUT
Cyap pee e
paac epa.
85

tapes)
Operation 2: Performing a
Digital program editing
(dubbing a tape)
Make sure your VCR and the other VCR are
connected, and that the other VCR is set to
recording pause. When you use the i.LINK cable
(DV connecting cable) this procedure are not
necessary.
When you use a camcorder, set its power switch
to VCR.
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in
in the menu
setting.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC to select TAPE,
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC to select START,
Search for the beginning of the first scene,
then start dubbing.
The program mark flashes.
The SEARCH indicator appears during
search on the screen.
The program indicator changes to light blue
after the dubbing is complete.
When the dubbing ends, both your
(playback) VCR and the other (recording)
VCR automatically stop.
To stop dubbing during editing

Press x using the video operation buttons.
To end the Digital program editing

function
Your (play back) VCR stops when the dubbing
ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO EDIT in
the menu settings.
Press MENU to end the digital program editing
function.
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
Oepa 2: Bee
p aa ppa
(epeac acce)
eec, Ba py
ea e py pyy,
pe py ea e
e pe ay p ac. p
ca ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) a peypa
ec eae.
p ca eaep ycae
ee epeae a ee VCR.
ycaax
(1) Bepe VIDEO EDIT
e.
(2) epe SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
yca TAPE, a ae ae a
c.
(3) epe SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
START, a ae ae a c.
pa yca EXECUTE, ae
ae a c.
Hae aa ep a
ae epeac.
aae ap ppa.
B pe ca a pae ec
ap SEARCH.
ce aepe epeac e
apa ppa eec a
ce-y.
a epeac
(cp) py
(aca) ea
aaec caaac.
ca epeac pe
aa
Hae y x, cy
ypae e.
y
p aa ppa
Ba (cp) ea
cac aepe epeac.
ae a cee ca ec VIDEO
EDIT ycaax e.
Hae y MENU e
y aa ppa.
86

tapes)
epeac yx
p a
ppa (a acceax)
You cannot record on the VCR when:

The tape has run out.
The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to
lock.
The IR SETUP code is not correct (when IR is
selected).
The button to cancel recording pause is not
correct (when IR is selected).
Ha ea e yacc
pec ac, ec:
aac ea.
eec a cpa ac a
accee ycae ee
p.
Hepa IR SETUP (ec pa
IR).
a e ay p ac
ec eep (ec pa IR).
Ma
a NOT READY ec a
pae, ec:
He caa ppaa ypae
ye p aa
ppae.
Bpa i.LINK, ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) e e.
e ea e
e (a ycae i.LINK).
Editing
NOT READY appears on the screen when:

The program to operate Digital program
editing has not been made.
i.LINK is selected but the i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable) is not connected.
The power of the connected VCR is not turned
on (when you set i.LINK).
87
Using with an analog video cae c aa

unit and your computer
eaapayp ep
Signal convert function
y pepaa caa
You can capture images and sound from an
analog video unit connected to your computer
which has the i.LINK (DV) jack via your VCR.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu setting.
,
A/V t DV OUT, then press the dial.
(5) Start playback on the analog video unit.
(6) Start capturing procedures on your
computer.
The operation procedures depend on your
computer and the software which you use.
For details on how to capture images, refer to
the instruction manual of your computer and
software.
M epec paee y c
aa eycpca,
e epe ea
epy c pae i.LINK (DV).
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(2) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
pa A/V t DV OUT, ae ae a
c.
(5) Be pe cpee a
aa eycpce.
(6) Hae epec a ep.
p ec p ac
cye epa
ppa ecee.
ee py pa
epece pae, c. cpyx
cyaa epa
ppa ecee.
S video cable (optional)/ae S video

(ppeaec e)
DV
AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT
S VIDEO IN
OUT
i.LINK
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
A/V connecting
cable (supplied)/
Other VCR/py ea Cee
: Signal flow/ ae ay/
pxee e
caa
(paaec)
88
A/V converting cable

(supplied)/
pepaae
ae ay/e
(paaec)
i.LINK cable (DV connecting

cable) (optional)/ae
i.LINK (cee
ae DV) (ppeaec
e)
After capturing images and sound
ce epeca pae ya
Stop capturing procedures on your computer,

and stop the playback on the analog video unit.
pepae peypy epeca a

ep cae cpeee a
aa eycpce.
Notes
You need to install software which can
exchange video signals.
Depending on the condition of the analog video
signals, the computer may not be able to output
images correctly when you convert analog
video signals into digital video signals via your
VCR. Depending on the analog video unit, the
image may contain noise or incorrect colors.
You cannot record or capture video output via
your VCR when the video includes copyright
protection signals such as the ID-2 system.
(GV-D1000 only)
You cannot record or capture video output via
your VCR when the video includes copyright
protection signals. (GV-D1000E only)
You can capture images and sound with an S
video cable (optional) instead of the A/V
connecting cable (supplied).
pea
Ba y yca ppae
eceee, eceaee e
ecaa.
B acc aeca aa
ecaa, ep e
epa paa ap ce
pepaa ea
aax eca pe. B
acc aa
eycpca, paee e
paca c epa
eepeae.
He ac epec
epae c
eaa, ec eppaa
ee ae ca a apcx
pa, a ccea ID-2. (T e
GV-D1000)
He ac epec
epae c
eaa, ec eppaa
ee ca a apcx pa.
(T e GV-D1000E)
Bec cee ae ay/
e (paaec), epec
paee y c ae S
video (ppeaec e).
If your computer has USB jack

You can connect your computer to your VCR
with USB cable, the image may flicker.
(p. 96)
If the other VCR has an S video jack
cable.
jacks of both your VCR and the other VCR.
format pictures.
Ma
cae c aa
eaapayp ep
y pepaa caa
Editing
Using with an analog video unit

and your computer
Signal convert function
Ec epe eec pae USB

M ce ep
eay c ae USB,
a paee e pa
(cp. 96).
Ec a py eae
eec e S video
paee e cpee
ee cep p ca ae
S video (ppeaec e).
p a cee e ac
a e eep (e)
cee ae ay/e.
e) ea S video a Bae
a py eae.
ceee e y
caecee paee paa
DV.
89
Inserting a scene from

the other VCR Insert
Editing
Bcaa a c py
eaa
Ma ca
You can insert a new scene and sound from the

other (playback) VCR onto your originally
recorded tape by specifying the insert start and
end points. Use the Remote Commander for this
operation.
Connections are the same as in Recording from
the other VCR or TV on page 32 or 34.
Insert a cassette containing the desired scene in
the other (playback) VCR to insert into your
(recording) VCR.
M ca y c
py (cpe)
eaa a ye acay ey,
yaa eca x aaa a.
cye y ca
ypae epa.
Cee aa ca
paee ac c py eaa
eepa a cp. 32 34.
Bcae py (cp)
ea accey c e ,
p peyec aca a
(aca) ea.
[a]
[A]
[b]
[c]
[B]
[C]
[A]: A tape that contains the scene to be

superimposed
[B]: A tape before editing
[C]: A tape after editing
90
[A]: ea, cepaa

ae
[B]: ea epe a
[C]: ea ce aa

(recording) VCR.
(2) On the other (playback) VCR, locate just
before the insert start point [a], then press
PAUSE to set the other (playback) VCR to the
playback pause mode.
(3) On your (recording) VCR, locate the insert
end point [c] by pressing m or M. Then
press X to set your (recording) VCR to the
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander. The ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator flashes and the end point of the
insert is stored in memory.
The counter shows 0:00:00.
(5) On your (recording) VCR, locate the insert
start point [b] by pressing m, then press
z REC and the button on its right
simultaneously then immediately press X to
set your (recording) VCR to the recording
pause mode.
(6) First press PAUSE on the other (playback)
VCR, and after a few seconds press X on
your (recording) VCR to start inserting the
new scene.
Inserting automatically stops near the zero
point on the tape counter. Your (recording)
VCR automatically stops. The end point [c]
of the insert stored in memory is canceled.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON a ce (acae)
eae.
(2) Ha py (cpe)
eae ae ec, e
ye cae [a], ae ae
y PAUSE yca py
(cpe) eaa
pe ay cpee.
(3) Ha (acae) ae
ae e cae a [c],
aa y m M. ae
ae y X yca
(acae) eaa
pe ay cpee.
(4) Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY a
ye ca ypae.
ap ZERO SET MEMORY ae
a, a ec a ca ye
cxpae a.
aae cea cae pa 0:00:00.
(5) Ha (acae) eae
ae ec aaa cae
a [b], aa y m, ae
pee ae y z REC
y cpaa ee, ce cpay
ae X yca
(acae) eaa
pe ay p ac.
(6) Caaa ae y PAUSE a
py (cpe)
eae , cyc ec
cey, y X a
(acae) eae
aaa ca ce.
Bcaa cac aaec
ece ye e cea. Ba
(aca) ea
aaec cac. Mec
a ca [c], cxpaee
a, ye yae.
Ma
Bcaa a c py
eaa Ma ca
Editing
Inserting a scene from the other

VCR Insert Editing
REC
0:00:00
ZERO SET
MEMORY
ZERO SET
MEMORY
91
Inserting a scene from the other

VCR Insert Editing
Bcaa a c py
eaa Ma ca
To change the insert end point
ee eca a
ca
Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step 5 to

erase the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and
begin from step 3.

in step 6, press X at the scene where you want to
Note
The picture and sound recorded on the portion
between the insert start and end points will be
erased when you insert the new scene.
If you insert scenes on the tape recorded with
another VCR (including other GV-D1000/
D1000E)
The picture and sound may be distorted. We
recommend that you insert scenes on a tape
recorded with your VCR.
When the inserted picture is played back
The picture and sound may be distorted at the
end of the inserted portion. This is not a
malfunction.
The picture and sound at the start point and the
end point may be distorted in the LP mode.
To insert a scene without setting the insert
end point
Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to
stop inserting.
Your VCR works in the commander mode VTR 2.
Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to
black paper.
92
Ca ae y ZERO SET MEMORY

ce ya 5 yae apa
ZERO SET MEMORY ae c ya 3.
cae ya
ca ypae
B ye 5 pee ae y
z REC y MARK, ae cpay ae
y X. B ye 6 ae y X
ece, e y aa ac.
peae
paee y, acae a ee
ey eca aaa a ca,
yy cep p cae a.
p cae a accey,
acay a py eae
(a pye e GV-D1000/D1000E)
paee y y caac.
Peeyec ca a ey,
acay c a
eaa.
p cpee cae
pae
paee y y caac
e cae a. Oa e
ec ecpac.
paee y pee LP y
caac aae e cae
a.
ca a e yaa eca
a ca
pyce y 3 4. Hae y x,
a y ca cay.
peae ce ya
ca ypae
Ba ea paae pee
ya ca ypae VTR 2.
Pe ya ca ypae
1, 2 3 cyc a
eaa pyx
ea p Sony
eae epa pa ya
ca ypae. Ec
cyec py ea
p Sony, e VTR 2 ya
ca ypae, peeyec
e pe ya ca
ypae ap a
ca ypae
eaa ep ya.
Audio dubbing
Ayepeac
You can dub additional sound on your recorded

tape by specifying starting and ending points.
The original sound will not be erased.
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Do not connect the video (yellow) plug.
B ee epeaca e
y a Bay acay accey ye
yaa e aaa a.
epaa y e ye cep p
.
cye y ca
ypae epa.
He cee e (e) eep.
AUDIO L
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO R
Ma
LINE OUT
L
R
Editing
Audio equipment
A/V connecting cable (supplied)

/ ()
: Signal flow /
Adding audio on a recorded

tape
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert your
recorded tape into your VCR.
(3) Locate the recording start point by pressing
H. Then press X at the point where you
want to start recording to set your VCR to the
(4) Press AUDIO DUB on the Remote
Commander. The green X indicator
appears on the screen.
(5) Press X and start playing back the audio you
want to record at the same time.
The additional audio is recorded in stereo 2
(ST2) during playback. While recording new
sound, the red
(6) Press x at the point where you want to stop
recording.
aee y caa
a acay accey
(1) e c a cae
acay accey c
ea.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(3) Hae ec aaa ac, aa
y H. ae ae y X
ece, e y aa ac,
yca eaa pe
ay cpee.
(4) Hae y AUDIO DUB a ye
ca ypae. ee
ap
X c a pae.
(5) Hae y X pee
ae cpeee ya, p
y aca.
e y ye aca
pee cepe 2 (ST2) pe
cpee. B pe ac
ya a pae ec pac
ap
.
(6) Hae y x ece, e
y a ac.
93
Audio dubbing
Ayepeac
Notes on audio dubbing

Additional audio cannot be recorded on a tape
already recorded in the 16-bit mode (32 kHz,
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz).
Additional audio cannot be recorded on a tape
already recorded in the LP mode.
You cannot add audio with the DV jack.
You cannot add audio on the blank portion of
the tape.
pea epeac
e y e e
aca a accey, ye acay
16- pee (32 , 44,1
48 ).
e y e e
aca a accey, ye acay
pee LP.
He a y c ea
DV.
B e ee aee ya
a eacay ac acce.
If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

(optional) is connected to your VCR
You cannot add sound to a recorded tape.
To record additional sound with the
microphone (optional)
Connect the microphone (optional) to the
microphone jack of audio equipment.
We recommend that you add additional audio
on a tape recorded with your VCR
If you dub additional sound on a tape recorded
with another VCR (including other
GV-D1000/D1000E), the sound quality may
deteriorate.
lock
You cannot record on a tape. Slide the write-protect
tab to release the write protection.
To add new sound more precisely
Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander at the point where you want to stop
recording later in the playback mode.
Carry out steps 3 to 5. Recording automatically
stops at the point where ZERO SET MEMORY
was pressed.
When playback pause mode lasts for five
minutes
Your VCR automatically enters the stop mode.
94
Ec eay cee
ae i.LINK (cee ae DV)
(ppeaec e)
B e cee a y a acay
accey.
ac e ya c
pa (ppeaec
e)
cee p (ppeaec
e) ey pa
ayaapayp.
Peeyec a
e y a accey,
acay c a
eaa.
p epeac e ya a
accey, acay c py
eaa (a pyy e
GV-D1000/D1000E), aec ya e
yxyc.
Ec a eec acce
ycae ee a ac
He ac a accey.
epee eec a ac
e a.
ee ae
ya
Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY a
ye ca ypae
ece, e y a ac e
pee cpee.
Be y c 3 5. ac
aaec caaaec ece,
e ye aaa a ZERO SET
MEMORY.
Ec pe ay cpee
pc 5 y
Bea aaec
epec pe caa.
Audio dubbing
Ayepeac
Monitoring the new recorded

sound
p aca
ya
To play back the sound
cpee ya
Adjust the balance between the original sound

(ST1) and the additional audio (ST2) by selecting
AUDIO MIX in
in the menu settings (p. 108).
Opeypye aac ey
epaa y (ST1)
e y (ST2), pa
ay AUDIO MIX
ycaax e
(cp. 113).
ST2
Five minutes after you disconnect the power

source or remove the battery pack, the setting of
AUDIO MIX returns to the original sound (ST1)
only. The default setting is original sound (ST1)
only.
Note
Pictures are not output through S VIDEO jack or
the AUDIO/VIDEO jack. Check the recorded
picture on the screen. You can monitor the
recorded sound by using headphones.
Ma
[MENU] : END
Editing
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
ST1
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
epe y ce cee
ca a c aape
a ycaa AUDIO MIX epec
epaay yy (ST1). ca
ya ec
epaa y (ST1).
peae
pae e c epe e S
VIDEO AUDIO/VIDEO. pepe
acaee paee a pae.
pep acae y c
x ee.
95
Viewing images recorded

on tapes on your computer
(Windows user only)
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
If you connect your VCR and computer using the

USB cable, you can view images recorded on
tapes on your computer. Furthermore, if you
images recorded on a tape to your computer, you
can process or edit it by computer software and
append it to e-mail.
p cee eaa
epa c ae USB
pcapa pae, acae a
acceax, a epe. ee , p
apye pae c aca acce
a ep x paaa
e c ppa
ecee, ycae a epe,
a ae pa ep e.
Connecting with USB cable and

viewing images on your computer
Installing the USB driver (p. 98).
Installing PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony (p. 102).
Capturing images with PIXELA ImageMixer
Ver.1.0 for Sony (p. 103).
Recommended computer
environment
OS:
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home
Edition or Windows XP Professional (standard
installation)
However, operation is not assured if the above
environment is an upgraded OS.
If you are using Windows 98, you cannot capture
sounds.
CPU:
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster
(800 MHz or faster recommended)
Application:
DirectX 8.0a or later
Sound system:
16 bit stereo sound card and speakers
Memory:
64 MB or more
Hard disk:
Minimum 200 MB available hard disk space for
installation
1 GB hard disk space or more recommended for
working area (depending on the file size of
editing video data)
96
ceee ae USB
pcp pae a
epe
caa paepa USB (cp. 98).
caa PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony (cp. 102).
epec pae c
ppa PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony (cp. 103).
Peeyea epa cpea

OC:
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home
Edition Windows XP Professional
(caapa ycaa)
Oa paa paa e apapyec,
ec yaaa e cpea ec
e OC.
Ec cyec Windows 98, epec
ya ee.
:
My Intel Pentium III 500 M e
(peeyec 800 M e)
pee:
DirectX 8.0a ee x epc
ya ccea:
Cepe ya apa 16-
ppe
a:
64 M ee
ec c:
My 200 M c eca a
ec ce yca
pae ac peeyec e
1 eca a ec ce ee (
acc paepa aa
peapa eax)
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
Display:
4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 600 dot
High color (16 bit color, 65,000 colors), Direct
Draw display driver capability (At 800 600 dot
or less, 256 colors and less, this product will not
operate correctly.)
Others:
This product is compatible with DirectX
technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.
ce:
Beapa c 4 M e O, paep
ce Direct Draw, epa
y 800 600 e High color (16-,
65000 e) (p 800 600 e e,
256 eax ee ycpc e ye
paa pa.)
pee:
ycpc cec c exe
DirectX, y ex yca
DirectX.
The USB connector is provided as standard.
Notes
Operations are not guaranteed if you connect
two or more pieces of USB equipment to a
single computer at the same time, or when
using a hub.
Depending on the type of USB equipment that
is used simultaneously, some equipment may
not operate.
Operations are not guaranteed for all the
recommended computer environments
mentioned above.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
Pentium is either registered trademark or
trademark of Intel Corporation.
All other product names mentioned herein may
be the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies. Furthermore,
and are not mentioned in each in this
manual.
Pae USB x caapy

ea.
a y ecya a
epax Macintosh.
Ma
This function is not available on

Macintosh.
Editing
Viewing images recorded on

tapes on your computer
(Windows user only)
pea
Hpaa paa e apapyec, ec
y epy pee
ac a ee ycpc
pya USB, p ca
epapa.
B acc a pya USB,
cye pee, epe
ycpca y e paa.
Hpaa paa e apapyec
cex epx cpe, yaax e.
Microsoft Windows c p
apa apecppa
p apa Microsoft Corporation
CA / pyx cpaax.
Pentium ec apecppa
p ap p ap Intel
Corporation.
Bce pye aea py,
yye yee, y
p apa
apecppa p apa
cecyx a. aee c
a cyae e yac
a pyce.
97

(Windows user only)
Installing the USB driver
Before connecting your VCR to your computer,
install the USB driver to the computer. The USB
driver is contained together with application
software for viewing images on the CD-ROM
supplied with your VCR.
Be sure to follow the steps before
connecting the USB cable to your
computer.
Connect the USB cable in step 8.
If the USB driver has been registered
incorrectly because your computer was
connected to your VCR before the installing
the USB driver, reinstall the USB driver
following the procedure on page 100.
For Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows
2000 Professional, Windows XP users.
Log in with permission of Administrator. (For
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP users)
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows
to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive of your computer. The
application software screen appears.
(3) Set the cursor on USB Driver and click. The
USB driver installation starts.
98
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
caa paepa USB
epe ceee eaa
epy ycae a epe
paep USB. paep USB cepc
ece c ppa eceee
pcpa pae a ce CD-ROM,
paae eay.
Oae e ec,
pee e ce ae USB
epy.
cee ae USB ye 8.
Ec paep USB apecppa
eep, cy ep
e eay
yca paepa USB, epeycae
paep USB, cey peype a cp.
100.
aee Windows 98SE,
Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP.
Be ccey a acpap. (
aee Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP)
(1) Be ep ec
apy Windows.
(2) cae paae CD-ROM
c CD-ROM epa. c
pa pa ppa
ecee.
(3) cae ypcp a ye USB Driver
ae y . Haec
ycaa paepa USB.
(4) Follow the on-screen messages to install the

USB driver.
(5) Set the USB MODE switch to VCR. (The
default setting is VCR.)
(6) Connect the AC power adaptor to your VCR
and then to a wall outlet (wall socket).
(8) With the CD-ROM inserted, connect the
(USB) jack on your VCR to the USB
connector on your computer using the
supplied USB cable.
Your computer recognizes the VCR, and the
Windows Add Hardware Wizard starts.
(4) Ceye yaa pax ce

yca paepa USB.
(5) cae epeae USB MODE
ee VCR. (caa
ya - VCR.)
(6) cee cee aaep
epee a eay, a
ae cee (ce) pee.
(7) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(8) Bca c CD-ROM, cee e
(USB) eaa c pae
USB epa c
paae ae USB.
ep pacae ea,
aycc ppaa Windows Add
Hardware Wizard.
Ma
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
Editing

(Windows user only)
USB connector/
Pae USB
USB cable (supplied)/

ae USB
(paaec)
(9) Follow the on-screen messages so that the
Add Hardware Wizard recognizes that the
USB drivers have been installed. The Add
Hardware Wizard starts three times because
three different USB drivers are installed. Be
sure to allow the installation to complete
without interrupting it.
If the Files Needed screen appears
(Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP
users)
Set the CD-ROM on the CD-ROM driver then
select Browse.... t My Computer t
ImageMixer t sonyhcb.sys, and click the
OK button.
The installation is completed, preceed to
Installing PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony on page 102.
(USB) jack/
e (USB)
(9) Ceye yaa pax

ce, ppaa Add
Hardware Wizard pacaa, USB
paep ycae. ppaa Add
Hardware Wizard aycaec p,
cy ycaaac p
pax paepa USB. ec
aepe yca, e pepa ee.
Ec c Hexe
a (Windows 2000 Professional
Windows XP)
cae a-c c CDROM, ae epe Browse.... (Op....)
t M ep t ImageMixer t
sonyhcb.sys ae y OK.
caa aepea, epee paey
caa PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony a cp. 102.
99

(Windows user only)
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
If you cannot install the USB driver
Ec e yaec yca paep

USB
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as

your computer was connected to your VCR
before installing the USB driver. Perform the
following procedure to correctly install the USB
driver.
Step 1 Uninstall the incorrect USB

driver
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows
to load.
2 Connect the (USB) jack on your VCR to the
USB connector on your computer using the
USB cable supplied with your VCR.
paep USB apecppa eep,

cy ep e
eay yca paepa
USB. Be ceyy peypy
pa yca paepa USB.
y 1 aee epa
paepa USB
1 Be ep ec
apy Windows.
2 Cee e (USB) a
eae c pae USB
epa c ae USB,
paae eay.
USB connector/
Pae USB

ae USB
(paaec)
3 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the
POWER switch to ON.
4 Open your computers Device Manager.
Windows XP:
Select Start t Control Panel t
System t Hardware tab, and click the
Device Manager button.
If there is no System inside Pick a
Category after clicking Control Panel,
click Switch to Classic View instead.
Windows 2000 Professional:
Select My Computer t Control Panel
t System t Hardware tab, and click
the Device Manager button.
Windows 98 SE/Windows Me:
t System, and click the Device
Manager tab.
100
(USB) jack/
e (USB)
3 cee cee aaep a

epee a ycae
epeae POWER ee ON.
4 Ope a ce epe
ppay ceep ycpc.
Windows XP:
Bepe Start (yc) t Control Panel
(ae ypae) t System
(Ccea) t ay Hardware
(Opyae) ae y Device
Manager (ceep ycpc).
Ec ce pa eea Control
Panel (ae ypae) e c
ee Ccea Pick a Category
(Bp aep), epe Switch to
Classic View (epec
accec ).
ae Windows 2000 Professional:
Bepe M ep t ae
ypae t Ccea t ay
Opyae ae y
ceep ycpc.
Windows 98 SE/Windows Me:
Bepe M ep t ae
ypae t Ccea ay
cpca.

(Windows user only)
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
5 Select the devices underlined in the

illustrations below, and delete them.
5 Bepe ycpca, epye a

pcye e, a ae yae e.
Editing
Windows ME
Windows 2000
Professional
Windows XP
6 Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and

then disconnect the USB cable.
7 Reboot your computer.
Step 2 Install the USB driver

Perform the entire procedure listed in Installing
the USB Driver on the page 98.
Ma
Windows 98 SE
6 cae epeae POWER

ee OFF (CHG), a ae
cee ae USB.
7 epeapye ep.
y 2 caa paepa USB

c e peypy,
peey paee caa paepa
USB a cp. 98.
101

(Windows user only)
Installing PIXELA ImageMixer
Ver.1.0 for Sony
caa PIXELA ImageMixer

Ver.1.0 for Sony
Install PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony to

your computer. PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony is contained on the CD-ROM supplied
with your VCR. You can enjoy viewing the
images esily on your VCR using your computer
with PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.
cae PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for

Sony a c ep. ppaa
PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony
cepc a ce CD-ROM, paae
eay. M e
pcapa pae a
eae c ppa
PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony,
ycae a epe.
To install and use this software in Windows 2000

Professional you must be authorized as a Power
User or Administrator, for Windows XP you
must be authorized as an Administrator.
to load.
While using your computer, close all running
applications.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CDROM drive of your computer.
The application software screen appears. If
the application software screen does not
appear, double-click My Computer and
then ImageMixer (CD-ROM Driver). The
application software screen appears after a
while.
102
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
yca ca ppa
ecee Windows 2000 Professional
ex ae paa
ye ae
acpapa, Windows XP ex
ae paa acpapa.
(1) Be ep ec
apy Windows.
B pe ca epa
ape ce paae pe.
(2) cae paae CD-ROM
c CD-ROM epa.
c pa pa
ppa ecee. Ec pa
pa ppa ecee
e c, a ae M
ep, a ae epe
ImageMixer (c CD-ROM). epe
epe pe c pa
pa ppa ecee.
(3) Move the cursor to PIXELA ImageMixer

and click.
The language selection dialog box appears.
(4) Select the language for installation.
(5) Follow the on-screen messages.
(3) epeece ypcp a PIXELA

ImageMixer ae y .
c ae pa a.
(4) Bepe yca.
(5) Ceye yaa pax
ce.
Follow the directions on the screen to install

Direct X. Direct X8.0 will be installed.
Ceye yaa a pae yca

Direct X. ye ycae Direct X8.0.

(Windows user only)
Capturing images with PIXELA
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony
To install and use this software in Windows 2000
Professional you must be authorized as a Power
User or Administrator, for Windows XP you
must be authorized as an Administrator.
epec pae c
ppa PIXELA
yca ca ppa
ecee Windows 2000 Professional
ex ae paa
ye ae
acpapa, Windows XP ex
ae paa acpapa.
Ma
pcp pae
ee VCR. (caa
ya - VCR.)
Oae epeec ee
VCR cee ae USB.
(2) Be ep ec
apy Windows.
(3) Be ae USB cee
e e ey (USB) a
eae, a py - paey
USB a epe.
Editing
Viewing images
(1) Set the USB MODE switch to VCR. (The
default setting is VCR.)
Be sure to set to VCR before connecting the
USB cable.
to load.
(3) Connect one end of the USB cable to the
(USB) jack on the VCR and the other end to
the USB connector on your computer using
with supplied USB cable.
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
USB connector/
Pae USB

ae USB
(paaec)
(4) Connect the AC power adaptor and insert a
cassette to your VCR.
(6) Select Start t Program t Pixela t
ImageMixer t PIXELA ImageMixer
Ver.1.0 for Sony on Windows.
(7) Click
on the left of the display.
The PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony

startup screen appears on your computer.
(USB) jack/
e (USB)
(4) cee cee aaep

epee a eay
cae accey.
(5) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(6) Bepe yc t ppa t
PIXELA t ImageMixer t PIXELA
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony e
Windows.
e ac
(7) Hae y
paa.
Ha epe pac aa
pa ppa PIXELA ImageMixer
Ver.1.0 for Sony.
103

(Windows user only)
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
(8) Click
(8) Hae
Preview window
O
peape
pcpa
(9) Press H on your VCR.

The images recorded on the tape appear on
the preview window.
(9) Hae y H a eae.

pae, acae a accee,
c e peape
pcpa.
Capturing images
epec pae
Still: Capturing still image
Hee: epec e
pae
Preview window
O
peape
pcpa
1
Thumbnail list window

O c cc
ex pae
(1) Click
.
(2) Click
at the point you want to capture,
while monitoring preview window.
The still image is captured. The captured
image appears on the thumbnail list
windows.
.
(1) Hae
(2) Hae
ece, pe
ex epeec,
p e peape
pcpa. Hee paee
epecc. acae paee
c ax c cc ex
pae.
Movie: Capturing moving picture
: epec pae
Preview window
O
peape
pcpa
1
2,3
104
Thumbnail list window

O c cc
ex pae
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
(1) Click
.
(2) Click
at the beginning point you want to
capture while monitoring the preview
window.
(3) Click
at the ending point you want to
capture while monitoring the preview
window.
The moving picture is captured.
The captured image appears on the
thumbnail list windows.
(1) Hae
.
(2) Hae
aa e, py
ex epeec,
p e peape
pcpa.
e e, py
(3) Hae
ex epeec,
p e peape
pcpa.
e paee ye
epeece.
acae paee c
ax c cc ex
pae.
If image date cannot be transferred by the

USB connection
before installing the USB driver. Perform the
following procedure to correctly install the USB
driver (p. 98).
If any trouble occurs
Close all running applications, then restart it.
Carry out the following operations after
quitting the application:
Disconnect the USB cable
Turn on/off the power
Change the USB MODE switch
pea
p pcpe pae c
epa c ceee USB, y
pc ceye c, pe
e c paa ecpac:
paee e eyc.
Ha pae y y
pae ex.
paee paaec epa,
ec ca pae aca
ccee e eee,
, cyec a
eae.
ap, eec a pae
eaa, e paac a
paex, cx a ep.
Ma
Notes
When you view images using your computer
with the USB connection, the following
conditions may occur, but do not indicate
malfunction:
The image may fluctuate.
The image may contain noise, etc.
The image does not appear properly if the
image signal is of a different TV colour system
from your VCR.
Indicators in the VCR screen do not appear on
images that are captured into your computer.
Editing

(Windows user only)
Ec e epea ae
pae cee USB
cy ep e
eay yca paepa
USB. Be ceyy peypy
pa yca paepa USB (cp.
98).
p e pe
ape ce paae pe,
ae epeayce x.
ce ap pe e
ceye epa:
Ocee ae USB
Be/e ae
cae epeae USB MODE
pye ee
105

(Windows user only)
Seeing the on-line help
(operation manual) of PIXELA
PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony is
provided with on-line help (operation manual).
(1) Click
button located in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
The Image Mixers Manual screen appears.
(2) You can access the desired topics from the
contents.
To close the on-line help
located in the upper right corner of the
Click
ImageMixers Manual screen.
If you have any questions about PIXELA
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony is trademark of
PIXELA corporation.
Refer to the information web site at:
http://www.imagemixer.com.
Note on using your computer

Communications with your computer
Communications between your VCR and your
computer may not recover after recovering from
Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.
pcp pae, acax

a acce, c epa
( aee Windows)
pcp epa
cpa (pyca
cyaa) ppa
PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for
Sony
Sony eec epaa cpaa
(pyc cyaa).
(1) Hae y , pacey
pa epxe yy paa.
c pa Image Mixers Manual.
(2) Hex pae p c
cepa.
ap epa cpa
Hae y , pacey pa
epxe yy paa ImageMixers Manual.
p e pc e
Sony
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony ec p
ap ppa PIXELA.
cee pa web-ca
apecy: http://www.imagemixer.com.
pea ca
epa
C c ep
C ey ea
ep e e ccac ce
xa epa pe Suspend,
Resume Sleep.
106
Changing the menu

settings
eee yca
e
To change the mode settings in the menu

settings, select the menu items with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be
partially changed. First, select the icon, then the
menu item, and then the mode.
ee yca pea
ycaax e epe ee e c
ca SEL/PUSH EXEC. ace
yca y ac ac.
Caaa epe pay, ae y
e, a ae pe.

desired icon, then press the dial to set.
desired item, then press the dial to set.
desired mode, and press the dial to set.
(6) If you want to change other items, select
RETURN and press the dial, then repeat
steps from 3 to 5.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Hae y MENU pae
yca e.
pa y aa, a ae ae
a c e yca.
pa y eea, ae ae
a c e yca.
pa y aa, a ae ae
a c e yca.
(6) Ec B xe e pye y,
RETURN, a ae
epe ay
ae a c, ce e pe
ec y c 3 5.
For details, refer to Selecting the mode setting of

each item (p. 108).
MENU
VCR SET
P EFFECT
D EFFECT
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/V DV OUT
RETURN
pe cee pee paee

Bp yca pea a
eea (cp. 113).
[MENU] : END
3
4
5
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
D I SPLAY
V I DEO EDIT
OTHERS
DATA CODE DATE/CAM
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
D I SPLAY
V I DEO EDIT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER VTR2
D I SPLAY
V I DEO EDIT
RETURN
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
D I SPLAY
V I DEO EDIT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
D I SPLAY
V I DEO EDIT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
VTR1
VTR2
VTR3
VTR4
VTR5
VTR6
OFF
Bee yax acpe eaa
Bee yax acpe eaa
VTR1
VTR2
VTR3
VTR4
VTR5
VTR6
OFF
OTHERS
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER VTR3
D I SPLAY
V I DEO EDIT
RETURN
[MENU] : END
107
Changing the menu settings
eee yca e
To make the menu display disappear
cp a e
Press MENU again.
Hae y MENU ee pa.
This manual refers to selecting and

deciding upon items by the above
procedure as Select and decide
upon [(item name)] in Icon name in
Menu.
B a pyce pa
ca ee c
eyaa peyp ypeec
paa Bepe [(aeae
eea)] Haae aa Me.
Menu items are displayed as the following

icons:
VCR SET
LCD SET
MEMORY SET
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
OTHERS
ee e paac e
ceyx a:
VCR SET
LCD SET
MEMORY SET
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
OTHERS
English
Selecting the mode setting of each item
z is the default setting.
The screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment.
Icon/item
Mode
Meaning
P EFFECT
To add special effects like those in films or on the TV (p. 36).
D EFFECT
To add special effects using the various digital functions (p. 38).
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
z STEREO
To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track tape with main and
sub sound (p. 27).
To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or a dual sound tape
with main sound.
To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or a dual sound
track tape with sub sound.
To adjust the balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 (p. 95).
ST1
108
ST2

Icon/item
A/VtDV OUT
Mode
Meaning
z OFF
To output digital images and sound in analog format using your

VCR.
ON
To output analog images and sound in digital format using your

VCR (p. 88).
NTSC PB
(GV-D1000E
only)
z ON PAL TV
LCD B. L.
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen to normal.
STILL QLTY
To play back a tape recorded in the NTSC colour system on a TV

with the NTSC 4.43 mode
BRIGHT
To brighten the LCD screen.
To adjust the color on the LCD screen, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC
dial.
To get LowTo get Highintensity
intensity
z FINE
STANDARD
To record still images in the fine image quality mode (p. 122).
To record still images in the standard image quality mode.
IMAGESIZE
z 320 240
160 112
REMAIN
PRINT MARK
z AUTO
To record moving pictures in 320 240 size (p. 124).

To record moving pictures in 160 112 size.
To display the remaining capacity of the Memory Stick in the
following cases:
For five seconds after inserting a Memory Stick into your VCR
When the capacity of the Memory Stick is less than one minute
while the display shows.
For five seconds after completing a moving picture recording
ON
To always display the remaining capacity of the Memory Stick.
ON
To write a print mark on the recorded still images you want to print
out later (p. 172).
z OFF
To cancel print marks on still images.
Note on NTSC PB (GV-D1000E only)

When you play back a tape on a Multi System TV, select the best mode while viewing the picture on
the TV.
Note on LCD B.L.
When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during recording.
Bee yax acpe eaa
MOVIE SET
LCD COLOR
(GV-D1000)
LCD COLOUR
(GV-D1000E)
NTSC 4.43
To play back a tape recorded in the NTSC colour system on a PAL

system TV
Even if you adjust LCD B.L., LCD COLOR (LCD COLOUR).

The recorded picture will not be affected.
109

Icon/item
PROTECT
Mode
ON
z OFF
Meaning
To protect selected images against accidental erasure (p. 168).
To not protect images.
SLIDE SHOW
To play back images in a continuous loop (p. 166).
PHOTO SAVE
To duplicate still images on tape onto Memory Stick (p. 140).
DELETE ALL
To delete all unprotected images (p. 170).
FORMAT
z RETURN
To cancel formatting.
OK
To format an inserted Memory Stick.

1. Select FORMAT.
2. Select and decide upon OK with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
3. After EXECUTE appears, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
FORMATTING flashes during formatting. COMPLETE appears
when formatting is finished.
TITLE
To superimpose a title or make your own title (p. 44, 49).
TITLEERASE
To erase the title you have superimposed (p. 48).
TITLE DSPL
z ON
OFF
CM SEARCH
z ON
To display the title you have superimposed.

Not to display the title.
To search using cassette memory (p. 56, 58, 61).
OFF
To search without using cassette memory.
TAPE TITLE
To label a cassette (p. 52).
ERASE ALL
To erase all the data in cassette memory (p. 55).
Notes on formatting
Supplied Memory Sticks have been formatted at the factory. Formatting with this VCR is not
required.
Do not turn off the POWER switch or press any button while the display shows FORMATTING.
You cannot format the Memory Stick if the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
Format the Memory Stick if
FORMAT ERROR is displayed.
Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick
Check the contents of the Memory Stick before formatting.
Formatting erases sample images on the Memory Stick.
Formatting erases the protected image data on the Memory Stick.
110

Icon/item
REC MODE
Mode
Meaning
z SP
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode.
LP
AUDIO MODE
z 12BIT
16BIT
qREMAIN
LTR SIZE
To record in the 16-bit mode (one stereo sound with high quality).
To display the remaining tape bar:
for about eight seconds after a cassette is inserted and your VCR
calculates the remaining amount of tape while the display shows.
for about eight seconds after H or DISPLAY is pressed.
ON
To always display the remaining tape indicator.
To set the date and time (p. 19).
z NORMAL
2
DEMO MODE
To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds).
To display selected menu items in normal size.

To display selected menu items at twice the normal size.
z OFF
To cancel the demonstration mode.
ON
To make the demonstration appear.
Notes on AUDIO MODE

You cannot dub audio sound on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in AUDIO MIX.
Notes on DEMO MODE
You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your VCR.
You cannot select DEMO MODE when a Memory Stick is inserted in your VCR.
Bee yax acpe eaa
Notes on the LP mode

When you record a tape in the LP mode on your VCR, we recommend playing the tape back on the
same VCR. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures
or sound.
When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master cassette so that
you can get the most out of your VCR.
You cannot perform audio dubbing on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for a tape to
be audio dubbed.
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in the LP mode, the
playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes.
CLOCK SET
z AUTO
To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP mode.
111

Icon/item
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
Mode
Meaning
z DATE/CAM
To display date, time and various settings during playback (p. 64).
DATE
To display date and time during playback.
To set the clock to the local time

Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set a time zone difference. The
clock changes by the time difference you set here. If you set the time
difference to 0, the clock returns to the originally set time.
z MELODY
NORMAL
To output a beep instead of the melody.
OFF
To cancel all sound.
z VTR2
To activate your VCR with a Remote Commander supplied with

your VCR.
VTR16
To activate your VCR with a Remote Commander supplied with a

Sony product.
For details, refer to Playing back a tape (p. 28).
OFF
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid remote control

misoperation caused by another VCRs remote control
z LCD
V-OUT/LCD
VIDEO EDIT
To output a melody when an unusual condition occurs on your

VCR.
z RETURN
To show the display on the LCD screen.

To show the display on the TV screen and LCD screen.
To cancel video editing.
TAPE
To program and perform video editing (p. 71).
MEMORY
To program and perform MPEG editing (p. 135).
Note on DISPLAY
The display does not appear when you connect and output through the i.LINK cable (DV connecting
cable).
Five minutes after removing the power source
The HiFi SOUND and AUDIO MIX items are returned to their default settings.
The other menu items are held in memory, even when the battery is removed.
112
eee yca e
Pycc
Bp yca pea a eea z ec yca

ya.
pa paae e ee, c p a e paa.
a/ee
Pe
Haaee
ae ceax e ae ex,
pe cyc ax a eee
(cp. 36).
D EFFECT
ae ceax e c pax
px y (cp. 38).
HiFi SOUND
cpee cepeec e e e c
y p c c cae
y (cp. 27).
cpee cepeec e c y
e aaa e e ya c c
y.
cpee cepeec e c y
pa aaa e e ya c
cae y.
peyp aaca ey cepeec aa 1

cepeec aa 2 (cp. 95).
ST1
ST2
(pee a ceye cpae)
Bee yax acpe eaa
AUDIO MIX
z STEREO
P EFFECT
113
eee yca e
a/ee
A/VtDV OUT
Pe
Haaee
z OFF
a c eaa px pae
ya aa pae.
ON
a c eaa aax pae

ya p pae (cp. 88).
NTSC PB
(
e
GV-D1000E)
z ON PAL TV
cpee e, aca ccee e

eee NTSC, a eepe c cce PAL
NTSC 4.43
cpee e, aca ccee e

eee NTSC, a eepe c cce NTSC 4.43.
LCD B. L.
z BRT NORMAL yca pa pc a pae .
LCD COLOR
(GV-D1000)
LCD-COLOUR
(GV-D1000E)
STILL QLTY
BRIGHT
ee p paa .
peyp ea a pae , epe c SEL/

PUSH EXEC.
Meee
ee ec
ec
z FINE
STANDARD
ac ex pae pee c
aeca (cp. 122).
ac ex pae pee caap
aeca.
MOVIE SET
IMAGESIZE
z 320 240
160 112
REMAIN
PRINT MARK
z AUTO
ac x pae pee 320 240 (cp. 124).

ac x pae pee 160 112.
pae ea c a a Memory Stick:
Ha cey ce ca Memory Stick
ea.
a ec Memory Stick cac ee, e a
1 yy, cec c ae ce.
Ha cey ce aepe ac
pae.
ON
c pae ea c a a
Memory Stick.
ON
ac ea aa a acax ex
paex, pe ex paceaa e (cp. 172).
z OFF
yae eax a a ex paex.
peae cpee NTSC PB ( e GV-D1000E)

p cpee e a eepe, epae ec cce, epe
ay pe pe pcpa pae a eepe.
peae LCD B.L.
p pe yca BRIGHT cp cy aape a cpac pep a
10 pe p ac.
ae cyae peyp LCD B.L., LCD COLOR (LCD COLOUR).
e e a acae paee.
114
eee yca e
a/ee
Pe
PROTECT
ON
z OFF
Haaee
a pax pae cya yae
(cp. 168).
e a pae.
SLIDE SHOW
cpee pae epepy y

(cp. 166).
PHOTO SAVE
epeac ex pae a accee a

Memory Stick (cp. 140).
yae cex eaex pae (cp. 170).
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
z RETURN
e papa.
TITLE
ae pa ca ce cce pa
(cp. 44, 49).
TITLEERASE
yae ae pa (cp. 48).
TITLE DSPL
z ON
OFF
CM SEARCH
z ON
pae ae pa.
, e paa p.
ca c acce a (cp. 56, 58, 61).
OFF
ca e acce a.
TAPE TITLE
app acce (cp. 52).
ERASE ALL
cpa cex ax acce a (cp. 55).
pea papa
Bxe e ap Memory Stick papa a ae. papae
a eae e peyec.
He ae epeae POWER e aae pe pae
a FORMATTING.
B e cee papa Memory Stick, ec eec a ac a Memory
Stick ycae ee LOCK.
Opapye Memory Stick, ec paaec cee
FORMAT ERROR.
B pe papa yaec c pa a Memory Stick
epe papae pepe cepe Memory Stick.
B pe papa yac ce pa pae a Memory Stick.
B pe papa yac ce ae aex pae a Memory
Stick.
Bee yax acpe eaa
papa cae Memory Stick.

1. Bepe FORMAT.
2. Bepe OK, epy c SEL/PUSH EXEC, ae a
c.
3. ce e a EXECUTE ae a c
SEL/PUSH EXEC. B pe papa ae a
FORMATTING. ce aepe papa c
a COMPLETE.
OK
(pee a ceye cpae)
115
eee yca e
a/ee
REC MODE
Pe
Haaee
z SP
ac pee SP (caape cpeee).
LP
AUDIO MODE
z 12BIT
16BIT
qREMAIN
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
ac 12- pee (a cepeecx ya).

ac 16- pee ( cepeec
caece y).
z AUTO
pae apa caec e:

c cey ce , a ye caea accea
ea c caeec ec e,
a a cee c cecya a.
pe eee c cey ce aa H
DISPLAY.
ON
c pae apa caec e.
yca a pee (cp. 19).
z NORMAL
2
DEMO MODE
w yee pee ac 1,5 paa cpae c

pe SP.
z OFF
ON
pae pax y e c paep.

pae pax y e paep e
e .
e pea ecpa.
, ac ecpa.
pea ce pea LP
Ec ac a accey pee LP ea a Bae eae, ee
peeyec cp a e eae. p cpee e
a pyx eaepax eaax, paee y y c exa.
p e ac pee LP peeyec ca acce Sony Excellence/
Master, y acae aec eaa.
B e ee ayepeac a ee, aca pee LP. e, a
p ye c ayepeac, cye pe SP.
Ec ac a ee ec peax SP LP epe acac
pee LP, cpe paee e cae pee
epa aca ey a.
pea pey AUDIO MODE
He ayepeac a ee, aca 16- pee.
p cpee e 16- pee B e ee peypa aac
ycae AUDIO MIX.
pea ce pea DEMO MODE
Ec accea caea ea, e pa ay DEMO MODE.
Ec Memory Stick caea ea, e pa ay DEMO MODE.
116
eee yca e
a/ee
DATA CODE
WORLD TIME
BEEP
pae a, pee pax yca

pe cpee (cp. 64).
DATE
pae a pee pe cpee.
yca ac a ece pe
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC yca pa
pee ey ac ca. aee pee
ec acc ycae pa. Ec
pa pee ycae aee 0, ac epyc
epaa ycaey pee.
z MELODY
NORMAL
a yep caa ec e.
OFF
e cex y.
z VTR2
e eaa c ya
ca ypae, cae c e
eaa.
VTR16
e eaa c ya
ca ypae, cae c ycpc Sony.
pe cee cepac paee Bcpeee
acce (cp. 28).
OFF
e ya ca ypae
eae e epa cpaaa, a
pa ya ypae py eaa.
z LCD
V-OUT/LCD
VIDEO EDIT
a e y caa p ea
cya c ea.
z RETURN
pae a a pae .
pae a a paax eepa .
e eaa.
TAPE
ca ppa e eaa (cp. 71).
MEMORY
ca ppa e aa pae
MPEG (cp. 135).
peae ce DISPLAY
paee e ec p e ca ae i.LINK (cee
ae DV).
epe y ce e ca a
ee HiFi SOUND AUDIO MIX epyc ac ycaa.
pye yca e yy caac a ae p cee aape a.
Bee yax acpe eaa
DISPLAY
Haaee
z DATE/CAM
COMMANDER
Pe
117
Memory Stick Operations
Oepa c Memory Stick
Using a Memory
Stick introduction
cae Memory
Stick Beee
You can record and play back images on a

Memory Stick (optional) with your VCR. You
can easily play back, record or delete images.
You can exchange image data with other
equipment such as your computer etc., using the
USB cable for Memory Stick (optional) with
your VCR.
Ha Bae eae
aca cp pae
a Memory Stick (ppeaec
e). B ee e
cp, aca ya
pae. Ha Bae eae
e a
pae c py aapayp,
apep, c ep .., cy
ae USB Memory Stick
(ppeaec e).
On file format
Still image (JPEG)
Your VCR compresses still image data in JPEG
format (extension .jpg).
O pae a
Moving picture (MPEG)
Your VCR compresses moving picture data in
MPEG format (extension .mpg).
Typical image data file name
Still image
100-0001:
This file name appears on the
screen of your VCR.
Dsc00001.jpg: This file name appears on the
display of your computer.
Moving picture
MOV00001:
This file name appears on the
screen of your VCR.
Mov00001.mpg: This file name appears on the
display of your computer.
Hee paee (JPEG)

Ba ea cae ae
e pae pa JPEG
(c pacpee .jpg).
e paee (MPEG)
Ba ea cae ae
pae pa MPEG (c
pacpee aa .mpg).
Oe aa ax pae
Hee paee
100-0001:
aa c a
pae eaa.
Dsc00001.jpg: aa c a
pe epa.
e paee
MOV00001:
aa c a
pae eaa.
Mov00001.mpg: aa c a
pe epa.
118

introduction
cae Memory Stick

Beee
cae Memory Stick

Terminal/a paea
Write-protect tab/
eec a
ac
pae e aca
cpa, ec eec a ac a
Memory Stick ycae ee
LOCK.
ee pa eeca a
ac e ac acc
e.
Peeyec ax
ax a ec ce epa.
ae pae y
pee ceyx cyax:
Ec B eaee Memory Stick
aee ae pe e
ac.
Ec Memory Stick cyec p c
ca caec epeca
ax e.
He pacaec eaec
peea aa eaec
aa paea.
ppee aey
app.
He cae, e pe epeae
cx yap Memory Stick.
He papae e pye
Memory Stick.
He ycae aa a a Memory
Stick.
He cye e xpae Memory Stick:
B c apx ecax, apep,
ae, papa ce
ece, a ce.
p ce ya.
B ecax e ax cepax
ppe ap.
p epece xpae ex
Memory Stick yp.
Memory Stick Operations Oepa c Memory Stick
You cannot record or erase images when the

write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set
to LOCK.
The position and shape of the write-protect tab
may be different depending on the model.
We recommend backing up important data on
the hard disk of your computer.
Image data may be damaged in the following
cases:
If you remove the Memory Stick or turn the
power off during reading or writing.
If you use Memory Sticks near static
electricity or magnetic fields.
Prevent metallic objects or your fingers from
coming into contact with the metal contacts of
the terminal section.
Stick the label on the labeling position.
Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to
Memory Sticks.
Do not disassemble or modify Memory
Sticks.
Do not let Memory Sticks get wet.
Do not use or keep Memory Sticks in
locations that are:
Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the
sun or under the scorching sun.
Under direct sunlight.
Very humid or subject to corrosive vapor.
When you carry or store a Memory Stick, put
it in its case.
Labelling position/
app
119

introduction
cae Memory Stick

Beee
Memory Sticks formatted by a

computer
Memory Stick, papae

a epe
Memory Sticks formatted by Windows OS or

Macintosh computers do not have a guaranteed
compatibility with this VCR.
Memory Stick, papae c

ep, cyx
epay ccey Windows
Macintosh, e aa apapa
cecc c a
ea.
Notes on image data compatibility

Image data files recorded on Memory Sticks
by your VCR conform with the Design Rules
for Camera File Systems universal standard
established by the JEITA (Japan Electronics and
Information Technology Industries
Association). You cannot play back on your
VCR still images recorded on other equipment
(DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSCD700/D770) that does not conform with this
universal standard. (These models are not sold
in some areas.)
If you cannot use the Memory Stick that is
used with other equipment, format it with this
VCR (p. 110). However, formatting erases all
information on the Memory Stick.
Memory Stick and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
Windows and Windows Media are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
their respective companies.
Furthermore, and are not mentioned
in each case in this manual.
120
pea cecc
ax pae
a ax pae, acae
ea a Memory Stick,
cecy yepcay caapy
pa pepa ax
cce eaep, ycaex
accae JEITA (ca acca
ep pec
pax ex). Ha Bae
eae e cp
ee pae, acae a
py aapaype (apep,
DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E DSCD700/D770), pa e cecye
y yepcay caapy. (
e e pac epx
peax.)
Ec B e ee ca Memory
Stick, pa cyec a py
aapaype, papye ee c
eaa (cp. 115). Oa
p papa c pa a
Memory Stick ye yaea.
Memory Stick
c
p apa ppa Sony.
Windows Windows Media c
apecppa p apa
p apa Microsoft Corporation
CA / pyx cpaax.
Macintosh Mac OS, QuickTime c
p apa Apple Computer, Inc.
Bce pye aea py,
yye yee, y
p apa
apecppa p apa
cecyx a.
aee c a cyae
e yac a pyce.

introduction
cae Memory Stick

Beee
Inserting a Memory Stick
caa Memory Stick
Insert a Memory Stick in the Memory Stick

slot as far as it can go with the b mark facing as
illustrated.
Bcae Memory Stick e

Memory Stick ypa a, a b
apae a, a aa a pcye.
b mark/a b
Memory Stick slot/

e
Memory Stick
Ejecting a Memory Stick
eee Memory Stick
Press the Memory Stick once lightly.
O pa cea ae a Memory Stick.
While the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not move or subject your VCR to vibration or
physical shock while the VCR is reading the data
from the Memory Stick or recording the data
on the Memory Stick. Also, do not turn the
power off, eject a Memory Stick, or remove the
battery pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown
may occur.
Ec ap pae p ae
He epeeae, e epae
ea pa ecy
ec, a cae ae c
Memory Stick acae ae a
Memory Stick. Tae e ae
ae, e ae Memory Stick e
cee aape . B p
cyae ae pae y
pee.
If
MEMORYSTICK ERROR is displayed
Reinsert Memory Stick a few times. If the
indicator is still displayed, the Memory Stick
may be damaged. In which case, use another
Memory Stick.
Memory Stick Access lamp/

ap pae
Memory Stick
Ec paaec a
MEMORYSTICK ERROR
ee cae Memory Stick
ec pa. Ec a -peey
paaec, , Memory Stick
peea. B cyae cye
pyy Memory stick.
121

introduction
About quality mode
You can select image quality mode in still image
recording. The default setting is FINE.
(2) Press MENU, then select and decide upon
STILL QLTY in
with the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial (p. 109).
(3) Select and decide upon the desired image
quality with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
cae Memory Stick

Beee
O pee aeca
p ac e pae
pa pe aeca
pae. caa ya FINE.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(2) Hae y MENU, ae epe
, epy c SEL /
STILL QLTY
PUSH EXEC, ae a c
(cp. 114).
(3) Bepe ye aec pae,
epy c SEL/PUSH EXEC,
ae a c.
2
MENU
122
MEMOR Y S E T
S T I L L QL T Y F I NE
MOVI E SET
S T ANDARD
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
SLIDE SHOW
PHOTO SAVE
DELETE ALL
R EMA I N
FOROMAT
12
RETURN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
S T I L L Q L T Y S T ANDARD
MOVI E SET
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
SLIDE SHOW
PHOTO SAVE
DELETE ALL
R E MA I N
FOROMAT
36
RETURN
[ ME N U ] : E N D

introduction
cae Memory Stick

Beee
Image quality settings
ca aeca pae
Setting
caa
Meaning
FINE (FINE) Use this mode when you want to

record high quality images. The
image is compressed to about 1/6.
STANDARD This is the standard image quality.
(STD)
The image is compressed to about
1/10.
Differences in image quality mode

Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format
before being stored in memory. The memory
capacity allotted to each image varies depending
on the selected image quality mode. Details are
shown in the table below.
Image quality mode
Memory capacity
FINE
About 100 KB
STANDARD
About 60 KB
Image quality mode indicator

The image quality mode indicator is not
displayed during playback.
When you select image quality
The number of images you can record in the
currently selected image quality appears on the
screen.
STANDARD caape aec

pae. paee
(STD)
caec pep 1/10.
pea
B epx cyax, acc
a pae, cey px B
pe, eee pea aeca
pae e e pac a
aece pae.
He pa pe aeca
pae x pae.
O pee aeca pae
epe cxpaee a acae
pae cac pae JPEG.
Ec a, eea a
pae, eec acc
pa pea aeca pae.
p aa ae e.
Pe aeca
pae
Oe a
FINE
O 100
STANDARD
O 60
Notes
In some cases, changing the image quality
mode may not affect the image quality,
depending on the types of images you are
recording.
You cannot select the image quality mode of
moving pictures.
Haaee
FINE (FINE) cye pe, ec

ex aca
caecee
pae. paee
caec pep 1/6.
ap pea aeca pae

ap pea aeca pae e
paaec pe cpee.
p pe aeca pae
ec pae, pe
c c pa pe aeca,
pac a pae.
123

introduction
About the image size
In record mode
Still images: 640 480.
Moving pictures: 320 240 or 160 112
You can select the image size in
the menu setting.
(The default setting is 320
240.)
In playback modes
Still image
: 1360 1020, 1152 864 or
640 480
Moving picture: 320 240 or 160 112
Selecting the image size of moving picture
MOVIE SET in
with the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial (p. 109).
(3) Select and decide upon IMAGESIZE with the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
(4) Select and decide upon the desired image
size with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
320
160
cae Memory Stick

Beee
O paepe pae
B pee ac
Hee pae: 640 480.
e
pae: 320 240 160 112
M pa paep
pae ycaax
e.
(ca ya
ec 320 240.)
B peax cpee
Hee
paee: 1360 1020, 1152 864
640 480
e
paee: 320 240 160 112
Bp paepa pae
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
, epy c SEL/
MOVIE SET
PUSH EXEC, ae a c (cp. 114).
(3) Bepe IMAGESIZE, epy c
SEL/PUSH EXEC, ae a c.
(4) Bepe y paep pae,
epy c SEL/PUSH EXEC,
ae a c.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
320
124
160

introduction
cae Memory Stick

Beee
2
MENU
MEMOR Y S E T
ST I L L QL TY
MOVI E SET
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
SLIDE SHOW
PHOTO SAVE
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
320 240
R E MA I N
1 5 SE C
[ ME N U ] : E N D
320
320 240
160 112
R E MA I N
1 5 SE C
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
MOVI E SET
IMAGESIZE
REMAIN
RETURN
160
320 240
160 112
MEMOR Y S E T
MOVI E SET
IMAGESIZE
REMAIN
RETURN
160 112
R E MA I N
3 6 SE C
[ ME N U ] : E N D
[ ME N U ] : E N D
Maximum recording time of moving pictures/

Macae pe ac x pae
Image size/Paep pae
Maximum recording time/Macae pe ac
320 240
15 seconds/15 cey
160 112
60 seconds/60 cey
MEMOR Y S E T
MOVI E SET
IMAGESIZE
REMAIN
RETURN
MEMOR Y S E T
MOVI E SET
IMAGESIZE
REMAIN
RETURN
125

introduction
cae Memory Stick

Beee
Approximate number of still images

you can record on a Memory Stick
pee ec
ex pae, pe
aca a Memory Stick
The number of images you can record varies

depending on which image quality you select
and the complexity of the subject.
ec pae, pe
aca, eec acc
pa aeca pae cc
ea.
Type/T
Image quality/aec pae
640 480
4MB (optional)
4MB (ppeaec
e)
FINE (FINE)
STANDARD (STD)
39 images/39 pae
58 images/58 pae
8MB (optional)
8MB (ppeaec
e)
FINE (FINE)
STANDARD (STD)
80 images/80 pae
120 images/120 pae
16MB (optional)
16MB (ppeaec
e)
FINE (FINE)
STANDARD (STD)
160 images/160 pae

240 images/240 pae
32MB (optional)
32MB (ppeaec
e)
FINE (FINE)
STANDARD (STD)
325 images/325 pae

485 images/485 pae
64MB (optional)
64MB (ppeaec
e)
FINE (FINE)
STANDARD (STD)
650 images/650 pae

980 images/980 pae
128MB (optional)
128MB (ppeaec
e)
FINE (FINE)
STANDARD (STD)
1310 images/1310 pae

1970 images/1970 pae
B epee ae yaa
ec ex pae, pe
aca a Memory Stick,
papay a Bae
eae.
The table above shows number of still images

you can record on a Memory Stick formatted
by your VCR.
Approximate time of moving

pictures you can record on a
Memory Stick
The time of moving pictures you can record
varies depending on which image size you select
and the complexity of the subject.
Type/T
4MB (optional)/(ppeaec e)
126
pec x pae,
pe aca, eec
acc pa pae
cc ea.
160 112
2 min. 40 sec./2 . 40 ce.
5 min. 20 sec./5 . 20 ce.
10 min. 40 sec./10 . 40 ce.
21 min. 20 sec./21 . 20 ce.
42 min. 40 sec./42 . 40 ce.
85 min. 20 sec./85 . 20 ce.
The table above shows times of moving pictures

you can record on a Memory Stick formatted
by your VCR.
Note
The table above does not mean continuous
recording time.
pea pec
x pae, pe
aca a Memory Stick
320 240
40 sec./40 ce.
1 min. 20 sec./1 . 20 ce.
2 min. 40 sec./2 . 40 ce.
5 min. 20 sec./5 . 20 ce.
10 min. 40 sec./10 . 40 ce.
21 min. 20 sec./21 . 20 ce.
B epee ae yaaa
pec ac x
pae, pe aca a
Memory Stick, papay a Bae
eae.
peae
peea e aa e payeae
epepe pe ac.
Recording an image
from a tape as a still
image
ac pae c
acce a e
pae
Your VCR can read moving picture data

recorded on a tape and record it as a still image
on a Memory Stick. Your VCR can also take in
moving picture data through the input connector
and record it as a still image on a Memory
Stick.
Ba ea e ca
ae pae,
acae a accee, aca x a
ee paee a Memory Stick.
Bea ae e pa
ae pae epe
x pae aca x a
ee paee a Memory Stick.
Before operation
Insert a recorded tape into your VCR.
Insert a Memory Stick into your VCR.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Hae y H. Haec
cpeee pae,
aca a accee.
(3) epe cea aa y PHOTO
ex p, a paee c e e
ye acpa. Ha pae
c a CAPTURE. ac
a e aec.
(4) Hae y PHOTO cee.
paee, paaee a pae,
ye aca a Memory Stick. ac
aepc, a cee
epeeac ca ap.

(2) Press H. The picture recorded on the tape is
played back.
(3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the
picture from the tape freezes. CAPTURE
appears on the screen. Recording does not
start yet.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed
on the screen will be recorded on a Memory
Stick. Recording is complete when the bar
scroll indicator disappears.
epe aa pa
Bcae acay accey
ea.
Bcae Memory Stick
ea.
MENU
2
PLAY
REW
CAPTURE
PHOTO
FF
PHOTO
127
Recording an image from a tape

as a still image
ac pae c acce
a e pae
Image size of still images

Image size is automatically set to 640 480.
Paep ex pae
Paep pae aaec
ycaaaec pa 640 480.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not move or subject the unit to vibration or
physical shock. Also do not turn the power off or
eject a Memory Stick. Otherwise, image data
breakdown may occur.
If appears on the screen
The inserted Memory Stick is incompatible
with your VCR because its format does not
conform with your VCR. Check the format of the
Memory Stick.
If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback
mode
Your VCR stops momentarily.
Sound recorded on a tape
You cannot record audio from a tape.
Titles have already been recorded on tapes
You cannot record the titles on Memory Sticks.
The title does not appear while you are recording
a still image with PHOTO.
Recording date/time
The recording data (date/time) when it is
recorded on Memory Stick is recorded.
When you press PHOTO on the Remote
Commander
Your VCR immediately records the image that is
on the screen when you press the button.
Ec ap pae p
ae
He epeeae aapa e epae
e pa ecy ec.
Tae e ae ae e
ae Memory Stick. B p
cyae ae pae y
pee.
Ec a pae c a
caea Memory Stick, pa e
ceca c ea, cy
ee pa e cecye pay
eaa. pepe pa
Memory Stick.
Ec pee cpee cea
aa y PHOTO
Bea a ee cac.
y, aca a accey
He aca y c acce.
Tp ye aca a accee
Tp e aca a Memory Stick.
Tp e c p ac e
pae c PHOTO.
aa/pe ac
p ac a Memory Stick yy aca
ae ac (aa/pe).
Ec aa y PHOTO a ye
ca ypae
Bea cpay e ae
paee, pe ye a pae
e aa .
128

as a still image
Recording a still image from
other equipment
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV
on to see the desired program.
The image of the other equipment is
displayed on the screen.
(3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 127.
ac pae c acce
a e pae
ac e pae
c py pya
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(2) Hae cpeee aca
acce e eep
pcpa y ppa.
paee c py pya
pac a pae.
(3) Be y 3 4 a cp. 127.
cae cee
ae ay/e
OUT
S VIDEO IN
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
VCR
Cee ae ay/e (paaec)
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
: Signal flow/pxee caa

cable to the video jack on the VCR or the TV.
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
cable.
jacks of both your VCR and the TV or the other
VCR.
format pictures.
cee e eep
cee ae ay/e
ey ecaa a eae
eepe.

Ec Bae eepe
eae eec e S video
paee e cpee
ee cep p ca ae
S video (ppeaec e).
p a cee e ac
a e eep (e)
cee ae ay/e.
e) ea S video a Bae
eae eepe py
eae.
ceee e y
caecee paee paa
DV.
129

as a still image
ac pae c acce
a e pae

cable)
cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)
DV
DV
i.LINK cable (optional)/

ae i.LINK
(ppeaec
e)
DV

Note
The may flash in the following instances. If
this happens, eject and insert Memory Stick
again, to avoid distorted images.
When recording on a tape in a poor recording
state, for example, on a tape that has been
repeatedly used for dubbing
When attempting to input images that are
distorted due to poor radio wave reception
when a TV tuner unit is in use
130
peae
ap e a ceyx
cyax. Ec cyc, ee
ca cae Memory Stick,
ycpa cae pae.
p ac a accey, axyc
ap ac cc,
apep, a accey, epa
cayc epeac
p e a pae,
cae a px c
cece x pea pa p
ca ee epa
Recording a picture
from a tape as a
moving picture
ac pae c
acce a
pae
Your VCR can read moving picture data

recorded on a tape and record it as a moving
picture on a Memory Stick. Your VCR can also
take in moving picture data through the input
connector and record it as a moving picture on a
Memory Stick.
Ba ea e ca
ae pae,
acae a accee, aca x a
e paee a Memory Stick.
Bea ae e pa
ae pae epe
x pae aca x a
e paee a Memory Stick.
Before operation
Insert a recorded tape into your VCR.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Hae y H. Haec
cpeee pae,
aca a accee.
ae ae y X ece, c
p y aa ac.
(3) Hae y MEMORY CAPTUREMPEG a Bae eae
y START/STOP a ye
ca ypae. a
IMAGESIZE ycaax e
ycae 320 240, acae
pe ac cca 15 cey. Oa
a IMAGESIZE ycaax e
ycae 160 112, acae
pe ac cca 60 cey.
N 0:1 5:4 2:4 3

0:0 3
[ 1 5 SEC ]
4 0 min
320 REC
BBB
[a]
[b]
PLAY
To stop recording
Press MEMORY CAPTURE MPEG.
PAUSE

(2) Press H. The picture recorded on the tape is
played back.
And press X at the scene where you want to
(3) Press MEMORY CAPTURE MPEG on your
VCR or START/STOP on the Remote
commander. When IMAGESIZE in the menu
settings is set to 320 240, the maximum
recording time is 15 seconds. However, when
IMAGESIZE in the menu settings is set to 160
112, the maximum recording time is 60
seconds.
epe aa pa
Bcae acay accey Ba
ea.
Bcae Memory Stick ea.
[a]: Recording time can be recorded on the

Memory Stick./
Bpe ac e aca a
Memory Stick.
[b]: This indicator is displayed for five seconds
after pressing MEMORY CAPTURE - MPEG
on your VCR or START/STOP on the
Remote Commander. This indicator is not
recorded./
ap paaec eee
cey ce aa
MEMORY CAPTURE MPEG a
eae START/
STOP a ye ca
ypae. ap e acaec.
ca ac
Hae y MEMORY CAPTURE MPEG.
131
Recording a picture from a tape

as a moving picture
ac pae c acce
a pae
Notes
Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to one
in 32 kHz when recording images from a tape
to Memory Sticks.
Sound recorded in stereo is converted to
monaural sound when recording from tapes.
pea
y, aca c ac 48 ,
pepayec 32 p ac
pae c acce a Memory Stick.
p ac c acce y, aca
pee cepe, pepayec
ec.

physical shock. Also, do not turn the power off,
eject a Memory Stick or remove the battery
pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may
occur.
Titles have already been recorded on tapes
You cannot record titles on Memory Sticks. The
title does not appear while you are recording a
moving image with MPEG.
If
AUDIO ERROR is displayed
Sound that cannot be recorded by your VCR has
been recorded. Connect the A/V connecting
cable to input images from an external unit used
to play back the image (p. 133).
Recording date/time
The recording data (date/time) of recording to
Memory Stick is recorded.
Ec ap pae p
ae
He epeeae, e epae
ea pa ecy
ec. Tae e ae ae,
e ae Memory Stick e
cee aape . B p
cyae ae pae y
pee.
Tp ye aca a accee
Tp e aca a Memory Stick.
Tp e c p ac
pae c MPEG.
Ec paaec ap
AUDIO
ERROR
aca y, p e e
aca Ba ea.
cee cee ae ay/
e a pae c ee
aapaa, cye
cpee pae (cp. 133).
aa/pe ac
p ac a Memory Stick yy aca
ae ac (aa/pe).
132

as a moving picture
Recording a moving picture
from other equipment
ac pae c acce
a pae
ac pae
c py aapayp
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(2) Hae cpeee aca
acce e eep
pcpa y ppa.
paee c py pya
pac a pae.
(3) Be peypy, cay a cp.
131, aa c ya 3, ece, c
p y aa ac.
cae cee
ae ay/e

OUT
S VIDEO IN
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO

Cee ae ay/e (paaec)
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT

cable to the video jack on the other VCR or the
TV.
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
cable.
jacks of both your VCR and the TV or the other
VCR.
format pictures.
cee e eep
cee ae ay/e
ey ecaa a py
eae eepe.

(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV
on to see the desired program.
The image of the other equipment is
displayed on the screen.
(3) Follow the procedure on page 131 from step
3 onwards to the point where you want to
start recording.
Ec Bae eepe
eae eec e S video
paee e cpee
ee cep p ca ae
S video (ppeaec e).
p a cee e ac
a e eep (e)
cee ae ay/e.
e) ea S video a Bae
eae eepe py
eae.
ceee e y
caecee paee paa
DV.
133

as a moving picture
ac pae c acce
a pae

cable)
cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)
DV
DV
i.LINK cable (optional)/

ae i.LINK
(ppeaec
e)
DV

Note
The may flash in the following instances. If
this happens, eject and insert Memory Stick
again, to avoid distorted images.
When recording on a tape in a poor recording
state, for example, on a tape that has been
repeatedly used for dubbing
When attempting to input images that are
distorted due to poor radio wave reception
when a TV tuner unit is in use
During recording on Memory Stick
Do not eject the cassette tape from your VCR.
When ejecting the tape, sound is not recorded on
the Memory Stick.
134
peae
ap e a ceyx
cyax. Ec cyc, ee
ca cae Memory Stick,
ycpa cae pae.
p ac a accey, axyc
ap ac cc,
apep, a accey, epa
cayc epeac
p e a pae,
cae a px c
cece x pea pa p
ca ee epa
B pe ac a Memory Stick
He eae accey eaa.
B pe ee acce y e ye
acac a Memory Stick.
Recording edited pictures as a

moving picture Digital program
editing (on Memory Sticks)
ac peapax pae
a pae p
a ppa (a Memory Stick)
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for

editing onto Memory Sticks.
M ec pa aca pae
aa (ppa) a
Memory Stick.
Making the program

(1)
(2)
(1)
cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Bcae accey, c p ex
cea ac, Memory Stick
ac Ba ea.
VIDEO EDIT
, epy c SEL/
PUSH EXEC, ae a c (cp.
117).
(4) Bepe MEMORY, epy c SEL/
PUSH EXEC, ae a c.
(5) Bepe IMAGE SIZE, epy c
a IMAGE SIZE ycae 320
240, acae pe ac
cca 15 cey. Oa, a
IMAGE SIZE ycae 160 112,
acae pe ac cca
60 cey.
(6) C ypae e
ae aa ep a,
p B xe ca, ae
ae X, a pe
pca cpeee.
Ty acpy
ap c c
C.
pa yca MARK, ae ae
a c, ae y MARK a
ye ca ypae.
Mec aaa IN ep ppa
ye ycae, e epxe
apa e ppa ec
a ce-y.
(8) C ypae e
ae e ep a, p
B xe ca, ae ae
y X, a pe
pca cpeee.
pa yca MARK, ae ae
a c, ae y MARK a
ye ca ypae.
Mec a OUT ep
ppa ye ycae, e
e apa e ppa
ec a ce-y.
(10) pe y c 6 9, ae
aepe ppay.
ce aepe ppa e
apa e ppa ec
a ce-y.
M cca e ee 20 ppa. 135
Set the POWER switch to ON.

Insert the tape for playback, and a Memory
Stick for recording into your VCR.
VIDEO EDIT in
with the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial (p. 112).
(4) Select and decide upon MEMORY with the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
(5) Select and decide upon IMAGE SIZE with
the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
When IMAGE SIZE is set to 320 240, the
maximum recording time is 15 seconds.
However, when IMAGE SIZE is set to 160
112, the maximum recording time is 60
seconds.
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene
you want to insert using the video operation
momentarily.
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with
c
or
C.
The IN point of the first program is set, and
the top part of the program mark changes to
light blue.
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you
want to insert using the video operation
momentarily.
The OUT point of the first program is set,
then the bottom part of the program mark
(10) Repeat steps 6 to 9, then set the program.
When one program is set, the program mark
You can set a maximam of 20 programs.
Cae ppa

ac peapax pae
a pae p
6,8
PAUSE
PLAY
MENU
REW
FF
STOP
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
I MAGE S I Z E
TOT A L
0:0 8:5 5:0 6

1 OU T
- - 1 5 S E C]
0- S EC [ - 320
[ ME NU ] : E ND
TOT A L
0:0 8:5 8:0 6

2 IN
- - 1 5 S E C]
3 S EC [ - 320
[ ME NU ] : E ND
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
I MAGE S I Z E
TOT A L
0:1 0:0 1:2 3

4 IN
- - 1 5 S E C]
1 3 S EC [ - 320
[ ME NU ] : E ND
Erasing the program you have set
aee aa ppa
Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last

program.
Caaa yae ey OUT, a ae ey

IN cee ppa.
(1) Select and decide upon UNDO with the SEL/

PUSH EXEC dial.
(2) Select and decide upon EXECUTE with the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
The last set program mark flashes, then the
setting is canceled.
(1) Bepe UNDO, epy c SEL/

PUSH EXEC, ae a c.
(2) Bepe EXECUTE, epy c SEL/
PUSH EXEC, ae a c.
ap cee ycae
ppa ae a, ae
yca yy ee.
To cancel erasing
Select and decide upon RETURN with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.
136
10
V I D EO E D I T
MA R K
UNDO
ERASE A L L
S T ART
I MAGE S I Z E
e yae
B ye 2 epe RETURN, epy c
ac peapax pae
a pae p
Erasing all programs
aee cex ppa
(1) Select and decide upon VIDEO EDIT, then

select and decide upon MEMORY with the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
(2) Select and decide upon ERASE ALL, then
select and decide upon EXECUTE with the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
All the program marks flash, then the
settings are canceled.
(1) Bepe VIDEO EDIT, ae epe

MEMORY, epy c SEL/PUSH
EXEC, ae a c.
(2) Bepe ERASE ALL, ae epe
EXECUTE, epy c SEL/PUSH
EXEC, ae a c.
ap cex ppa ay
a, ae yca yy ee.
To cancel erasing of all programs

e yae cex ppa

To cancel a program you have set

Press MENU.
The program is stored in memory until the tape
is ejected.
e ycae ppa
Hae y MENU.
ppaa xpac a ea
ee acce.
Notes
You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or
the contents of cassette memory.
You cannot operate recording during the digital
program editing on Memory Sticks.
You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portion of
the tape.
If there is a blank portion between IN and OUT
on the tape, the total time code may not be
displayed correctly.
pea
B e ee epeaca p,
ap a cee cepae
acce a.
He ac pe
p aa ppa a Memory
Stick.
Me aaa IN a OUT e
yca a eaca ac acce.
Ec a accee ec eaca yac
ey ea IN OUT, e
pee e paac epa.
While making a program

If you eject the cassette, NOT READY appears on
the screen. The program will be erased.
If you set over the maximum recording time
The program mark changes to yellow, and OVER
15 SEC LIMIT appears when IMAGE SIZE is set
to 320 240, or OVER 60 SEC LIMIT appears
when IMAGE SIZE is set to 160 112. However,
you can record up to the maximum recording
time.
p ca ppa
Ec e accey, a pae c
a NOT READY. ppaa ye
yaea.

Ec ycaaaec pe,
peaee acae pe ac
e apa e ppa
ec a e, , ec IMAGE
SIZE ycae 320 240, c
a OVER 15 SEC LIMIT, a ec
IMAGE SIZE ycae 160 112, c
a OVER 60 SEC LIMIT. Oa
ac eee pee,
caec ce aca
pee ac.
137

Performing the program
(Dubbing a Memory Stick)
Bee ppa
(epeac Memory Stick)
(1) Select and decide upon VIDEO EDIT in the

menu settings, then select and decide upon
MEMORY with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
(2) Select and decide upon START, then select
and decide upon EXECUTE with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial.
Search for the beginning of the first program,
then start dubbing.
The program mark flashes.
The SEARCH indicator appears during
search, the EDITING indicator appears
during writing of data on your VCR, and
REC appears during dubbing on the screen.
The PROGRAM indicator changes to light
blue after dubbing is complete.
When the dubbing ends, your VCR
automatically stops.
(1) Bepe VIDEO EDIT ycaax e,

ae epe MEMORY, epy c
(2) Bepe START, ae epe
EXECUTE, epy c SEL/PUSH
EXEC, ae a c.
Hae aa ep ppa
ae epeac.
aae ap ppa.
ap SEARCH ec pe
ca, ap EDITING ec
pe ac ax a ea, a
ap REC ec pe
epeac a pae.
ce aepe epeac e
apa PROGRAM eec a cey.
aepe epeac ea
aaec cac.
To stop dubbing during editing
ca epeac pe
aa
Press x using the video operation buttons.

The program you made is recorded on a
Memory Stick up to the place where you
pressed x.
To end the Digital program editing

function
Your VCR stops when the dubbing ends. Then
the display returns to VIDEO EDIT in the menu
settings.
Press MENU to end the program editing
function.
138
ac peapax pae
a pae p
Hae y x, cy
ypae e.
Caa ppaa acaec a
Memory Stick eca, e aaa
a x.
y
p aa ppa
Bea cac aepe
epeac. ae a cee ca
ec VIDEO EDIT ycaax e.
Hae y MENU aepe
y aa ppa.

ac peapax pae
a pae p
NOT READY appears on the screen when:

The program to operate the Digital program
editing has not been made.
The Memory Stick is not inserted.
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is
set to LOCK.
Memory Stick does not have enough space to
record.
a NOT READY ec a
pae, ec:
He caa ppaa ypae ye
p aa ppae.
He caea Memory Stick.
eec a ac a Memory Stick
ycae ee LOCK.
Ha Memory Stick e xaae eca
ac.
When Memory Stick does not have enough

space to record
MEMORY FULL appears on the screen.
However, you can record pictures up to the time
indicated.
Ec a Memory Stick e xaae eca

ac
Ha pae c a MEMORY
FULL. Oa, aca
pae eee yaa pee.
Ec ycaaaec pe,
peaee acae pe ac
Ha pae c a OVER
MEMORY LIMIT. Oa aca
e pae eee pee,
caec ce aca
pee ac.
If you set over the maximum recording time

OVER MEMORY LIMIT appears on the screen.
However, you can record moving pictures up to
the maximum recording time.
139
Copying still images

from a tape
Photo save
pae ex
pae c acce
Cxpaee a c
Using the search function, you can automatically

take in only still images from tapes and record
them on a Memory Stick in sequence.
C y ca
aaec ea c
ex pae c acce
ceae aca x a Memory
Stick.
Before operation
Insert a recorded tape into your VCR and
rewind the tape.
with the SEL/PUSH
PHOTO SAVE in
EXEC dial (p. 110).
PHOTO BUTTON appears on the screen.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image from
the tape is recorded on a Memory Stick.
The number of still images copied is
displayed. END is displayed when copying is
completed.
epe aa pa
Bcae acay accey
ea epeae ee a
aa.
Bcae Memory Stick
ea.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
PHOTO SAVE
, epy c SEL/
Ha pae c a PHOTO
BUTTON.
(3) Hae y PHOTO cee.
Hee paee c acce
ye aca a Memory Stick.
Opac ec cpax
ex pae.
aepe pa pac
a END.
P HO T O S A V E
0:0 0:0 0:0 0
MENU
140
STD
END
4
SAV I NG
0
[ ME N U ] : E N D
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
ST I L L QL TY
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E R E A D Y
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
P HO T O S A V E
0:3 0:0 0:0 0

8 / 15
640 STD
PHOTO
P HO T O S A V E
4 / 15
0:0 0:0 0:0 0

4 / 15
STD
PHOTO BUTTON
[ P HO T O ] : S T A R T [ ME NU ] : E ND
Copying still images from a tape

Photo save
pae ex pae c
acce Cxpaee a c
To stop copying
Press MENU.
ca pa
Hae y MENU.
When the memory of the Memory

Stick is full
B cyae epee Memory

Stick
MEMORY FULL appears on the screen, and

copying stops. Insert another Memory Stick
and repeat the procedure from step 2.
Ha pae c a MEMORY
FULL, pae pepac. Bcae
pyy Memory Stick pe peypy
c ya 2.
Image size of still images

Image size is automatically set to 640 480.
If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick

is set to LOCK
NOT READY appears when you select the item
in the menu settings.
Ec ap pae p
ae
He epeeae, e epae
ea pa ecy
ec. Tae e ae ae,
e ae Memory Stick e
cee aape . B p
cyae ae pae y
pee.
When you change Memory Sticks in the

middle of copying
Your VCR resumes copying from the last image
recorded on the previous Memory Stick.
Ec eec a ac a Memory
Stick ycae ee LOCK
p pe eea ycaax e
c a NOT READY.
Ec ae Memory Stick cepee
pa
Ba ea
pae, aa c cee
pae, aca a peye
Memory Stick.

physical shock. Also, do not turn the power off,
eject a Memory Stick or remove the battery
pack. Otherwise, image data breakdown may
occur.
Paep ex pae
Paep pae aaec
ycaaaec pa 640 480.
141

Memory photo
playback
pcp e
pae Bcpeee
c a
You can play back still images recorded on a

Memory Stick. You can also play back
six images including moving pictures in
numerical order at one time by selecting the
index screen.
B ee cp ee
pae, acae a Memory Stick.
M ae cp
pee ec pae pe
ep, a e, ye pa
ec paa.
Before operation
epe aa pa

(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded
image is displayed.
(3) Press MEMORY +/ to select the desired still
image. To see the previous image, press
MEMORY . To see the next image, press
MEMORY +.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Hae y MEMORY PLAY.
c ceee acae
paee.
(3) Hae y MEMORY +/ pa
y e pae.
pcpa peye pae
ae y MEMORY .
pcpa ceye pae
ae y MEMORY +.
PLAY
To stop memory photo playback

Press MEMORY PLAY.
ca cpee
c a
Hae y MEMORY PLAY.
Note
You may not be able to play back images with
your VCR:
when playing back image data modified on
your computer.
when playing back image data shot with other
equipment.
142
peae
B, pae e yy
cpc c
eaa:
p cpee ax pae,
pe ee c
epa.
p cpee ax pae,
c c py
epya.

Memory photo playback
pcp e pae
Bcpeee c a
Notes on the file name

The directory number may not be displayed
and only the file name may be displayed if the
structure of the directory does not conform to
the DCF standard.
- DIRECTORY ERROR may appear on

the screen if the structure of the directory does
not conform to the DCF standard. While this
message appears, you can play back images but
cannot record them on the Memory Stick.
The file name flashes on the screen if the file is
corrupted or the file is unreadable.
pea e aa
Ec cpyypa aaa e cecye
caapy DCF, ep aaa e e
paac, a ye paac
aa.
Ec cpyypa aaa e cecye
caapy DCF, a pae e
- DIRECTORY
c cee
ERROR. p e ce
cp pae,
e aca x a Memory Stick.
aa ae a pae, ec a
pee e aec.
When no image is recorded on the Memory

Stick
The message
NO FILE appears.
cpee acax
pae a pae eepa
epe aa pa cee
ea eepy c
cee ae ay/e,
paae eay.
p cpee c
a a pae eepa
eaa aec pae
e yxyc. Oa e ec
ecpac. ae pae
axc e cc, a pee.
Ec a Memory Stick e acax
pae
c cee
NO FILE.
To play back recorded images on a TV screen

Connect your VCR to the TV with the
A/V connecting cable supplied with your VCR
before operation.
When operating memory photo playback on a
TV or on the screen, the image quality may
appear to have deteriorated. This is not a
malfunction. The image data is as good as ever.
143

Screen indicators during still
image playback
pcp e pae
Bcpeee c a
pae ap pe
cpee ex
pae
[b]
100-0006
6 / 100
MEMORY PLAY
[c]
[d]
JUL 4 2002
12:05:56 AM
[e]
[a]
144
[a] Data Directory Number, File Number

[b] Image number/Total number of
recorded images
[c] Print mark
[d] Protect
[e] Recording data
[a] Hep aaa ax, ep aa

[b] Hep pae/Oee ec
acax pae
[c] ea a
[d] aa
[e] aa

peae ( e GV-D1000E)
ap paae 4 7 2002.
Recording data
When you press DATA CODE on the Remote
Commander, you can see the recording data
(date/time or various settings when recorded).
ae ac
p aa DATA CODE a ye
ca ypae
pcpe ae ac (ay/pe
pae yca a e ac).

pcp e pae
Bcpeee c a
Playing back six recorded

images at a time (index screen)
Opeee cpeee ec
acax pae (ec pa)
You can play back six recorded images at a time.

This function is especially useful when searching
for a particular image.
M cp ec acax
pae pee. a y
ec ce e p e
ca ex pae.

(2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the index
screen.
INDEX
A red B mark appears above the image that is

displayed before changing to the index screen
mode.
Ha paee c paca ea
B, pa paaec epe
epeee pe ec paa.
MEMORY : to display the previous six images

MEMORY + : to display the following six images
MEMORY : pae ec
peyx pae
MEMORY + : pae ec
ceyx pae
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Hae y MEMORY INDEX
pae ec paa.
B mark/
Mea B
100-0006
6 / 100
145

pcp e pae
Bcpeee c a
To return to the normal playback

screen (single screen)
paa pay
cpee ( pa)
Hae y MEMORY +/
epeee e B pae,
pe ex pa ec
pa, ae ae y MEMORY PLAY.
Press MEMORY +/ to move the B mark to the

image you want to display on full screen, then
press MEMORY PLAY.
Note
When displaying the index screen, a number
appears above each image. This indicates the
order in which images are recorded on the
Memory Stick. These numbers are different
from the data file names (p. 118).
Image data modified with your computers or
shot with other equipment
These files may not be displayed on the index
screen.
146
peae
p pae ec paa a
a paee ye c
ep. O aae p, p
pae aca a Memory Stick.
epa ac e a
ax (cp. 118).
pae, eee c
epa ce c py
aapayp
a e y paac a
ec pae.
Viewing a moving
picture MPEG movie
playback
pcp
pae
Bcpeee a MPEG
You can play back moving pictures recorded on a

Memory Stick. You can also play back six
images including still images in numerical order
at one time by selecting the index screen.
M cp e
p pe ec paa ae
cp ec pae, a
ee, pe x ep.
Before operation
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
c ceee acae
paee.
yx x pae.
pcpa peye pae
ae y MEMORY .
pcpa ceye pae
ae y MEMORY +.
(4) Hae y MPEG N X aaa
cpee.
PLAY
To stop MPEG movie playback

Press MEMORY PLAY.

image is displayed.
(3) Press MEMORY +/ to select the desired
moving pictures. To see the previous picture,
press MEMORY . To see the next picture,
press MEMORY +.
(4) Press MPEG N X to start playback.
epe aa pa
ca cpee
a MPEG
Hae y MEMORY PLAY.
147

MPEG movie playback
pcp pae
Bcpeee a MPEG
Note
You may not be able to play back images with
your VCR:
when playing back image data modified on
your computer.
when playing back image data shot with other
equipment.
peae
B, pae e yy
cpc c
eaa:
p cpee ax pae,
pe ee c
epa.
p cpee ax pae,
c c py
epya.
To play back recorded images on a TV screen

Connect your VCR to the TV with the A/V
connecting cable supplied with your VCR before
operation.
When no image is recorded on the Memory
Stick
The message NO FILE appears.
cpee acax
pae a pae eepa
epe aa pa cee
ea eepy c
cee ae ay/e,
paae eay.
Ec a Memory Stick e acax
pae
c cee
NO FILE.
148

MPEG movie playback
pcp pae
Bcpeee a MPEG
Screen indicators during

moving picture playback
pae ap pe
cpee x
pae
[b]
[c]
MO V 0 0 0 0 1
320
2 / 20
MEMOR Y P L A Y
0:1 2
[d]
[e]
JUL 4 2002
12:05:56 AM
[f]
[a]
[a] Data directory number/File number
[b] Image size
[c] Picture number/Total number of
recorded pictures
[d] Memory playback
[e] Protect
[f] Recording date/time.
(Various settings are displayed as .)
[a] Hep aaa ax/ep aa

[b] Paep pae
[c] Hep pae/Oee ec
acax pae
[d] Bcpeee a
[e] aa
[f] aa/pe ac. (Pae
yca paac a .)

peae ( e GV-D1000E)
ap paae 4 7 2002.
Recording date/time
To display the recording date/time, press DATA
CODE on the Remote Commander during
playback.
aa/pe ac
pae a/pee ac
ae y DATA CODE a ye
ca ypae pe
cpee.
149
Viewing images recorded

on Memory Sticks on
your computer
pcp pae,
acax a Memory Stick,
c epa
You can view data recorded on the Memory

Stick using your computer.
M pcapa ae, acae

a Memory Stick, cy ep.
Note
Data recorded on the Memory Stick is stored in
the following formats. Make sure that
applications that support these file formats are
installed on your computer.
Still images:
JPEG format
Moving images/audio: MPEG format
peae
ae, acae a Memory Stick,
xpac ceyx paax. eec,
a epe ycae pe,
pe epa pa a.
Hee pae:
pa
JPEG
e pae/y: pa
MPEG
Viewing images using computer

For Windows users (p. 151)
For Macintosh users (p. 157)
Notes on using your computer (p. 161)
Notes
Operations are not guaranteed for either the
Windows or Macintosh environment if you
connect two or more pieces of USB equipment
to a single computer at the same time, or when
using a hub.
Depending on the type of USB equipment that
is used simultaneously, some equipment may
not operate.
Operations are not guaranteed for all the
recommended computer environments
mentioned above.
Windows and Windows Media are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
their respective companies. Furthermore,
and are not mentioned in each case in this
manual.
150
pcp pae c
epa
aee Windows (cp. 151)
aee Macintosh (cp. 157)
pea ca epa
(cp. 161)
pea
Hpaa paa cpee Windows
Macintosh e apapyec, ec y
epy pee e a
ee ycpc USB p
ca epapa.
B acc a pya USB,
cye pee, epe
ycpca y e paa.
Hpaa paa e apapyec
cex epx cpe, yaax e.
Windows Windows Media c
p apa
apecppa p apa
Microsoft Corporation CA / pyx
cpaax.
Bce pye aea py,
yye yee, y
p apa
apecppa p apa
cecyx a. aee c
a cyae e yac
a pyce.

Memory Sticks on your
computer
For Windows users
pcp pae,
acax a Memory Stick, c
epa
aee Windows
Peeyea cpea Windows
OC: Tpeyec caapa ycaa
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE,
Windows Me Windows 2000
Professional, Windows XP HomeEdition,
Windows XP Professional.
Oa paa paa e
apapyec, ec yaaa e
cpea ec e OC.
: MMX Pentium 200 M e
The USB connector must be provided as

standard.
Pae USB e x caapy

ea.
caa paepa USB

driver is contained together with CD-ROM
which is supplied with your VCR.
If you have installed the USB driver in Viewing
images recorded on tapes on your computer
(Windows user only). Follow step 6 on page
152.
For Windows XP users
The USB driver needs not be installed. Your
computer is automatically recognized as a driver
just by connecting your computer using the USB
cable.
Set the USB MODE switch to
(MEMORY
STICK). (The default setting is VCR.)
For Windows 98/98SE/Me, Windows 2000
Professional users
Log in with permission of Administrator. (For
Windows 2000 Professional users)
Be sure follow the steps before
connecting the USB cable to your
computer.
Connect the USB cable in step 7.
If the USB driver has been registered
incorrectly because your computer was
connected to your VCR before installation of
the USB driver was completed, re-install the
USB driver following the procedure on page
153.
(1) Turn on the power of your computer and
allow Windows to load.
epe ceee eaa

epy ycae a epe
paep USB. paep USB cepc a
ce CD-ROM, paae
eay.
Ec paep USB ycae paee
pcp pae, acax a
acce, c epa (
aee Windows). Be y 6
a cp. 152.
aee Windows XP
caa paepa USB e peyec. Ba
ep aaec pacaec a
paep cpay ce e cee c
ae USB.
cae epeae USB MODE
ee
(MEMORY STICK).
(caa ya - VCR.)
pep: aee Windows 98/
98SE/Me, Windows 2000 Professional
Be ccey a acpap. (
aee Windows 2000 Professional)
Recommended Windows environment

OS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE,
Windows Me or Windows 2000
Professional, Windows XP HomeEdition,
Windows XP Professional standard
installation is required.
However, operation is not assured if the
above environment is an upgraded OS.
CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster
Oae e ec,
pee e ce ae USB
epy.
cee ae USB ye 7.
Ec paep USB apecppa
eep, cy ep
e eay
aepe yca paepa USB,
epeycae paep USB, cey
peype a cp. 153.
(1) Be ep ec
apy Windows.
(pee a ceye cpae)
151

computer
pcp pae,
epa
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM

drive of your computer. The application
software screen appears.
(3) Set the cursor on USB Driver and click.
USB driver installation starts.
(2) cae paae c CD-ROM

c CD-ROM epa. c
pa pa ppa
ecee.
(3) cae ypcp a ye USB Driver
ae y . Haec
ycaa paepa USB.
(4) Follow the on-screen messages to install the

USB driver.
(5) Restart your computer.
(6) Connect the AC power adaptor and set the
USB MODE switch to
(MEMORY
STICK).
The default setting is VCR.
(7) Set the POWER switch to ON, and insert a
Memory Stick into your VCR.
(8) Connect the (USB) jack on your VCR with
the USB connector on your computer using
the supplied USB cable.
USB MODE appears on the screen of your
VCR. Your computer recognizes the VCR,
and the Windows Add Hardware Wizard
starts.
(9) Follow the on-screen messages to have the
Add Hardware Wizard recognize the
hardware. The Add Hardware Wizard starts
twice because two different USB drivers are
installed. Be sure to allow the installation to
complete without interrupting it.
(4) Ceye yaa pax ce

yca paepa USB.
(5) epeapye ep.
(6) cee cee aaep a
epee a ycae
epeae USB MODE ee
(MEMORY STICK).
caa ya - VCR.
(7) cae epeae POWER
ee ON cae Memory Stick
c ea.
(8) Cee e (USB)
eaa c pae USB
epa c
paae ae USB. Ha pae
eaa c a
USB MODE. ep pacae
ea, aycc
ppaa Windows Add Hardware Wizard.
(9) Ceye yaa pax
ce, ppaa Add
Hardware Wizard pacaa aapae
eceee. ppaa Add Hardware
Wizard aycaec a, cy
ycaaac a pax
paepa USB. ec aepe
yca, e pepa ee.
USB connector/
Pae USB
152
(USB) jack/
e (USB)

ae USB
Push into the end/
(paaec)
Hae ypa
pcp pae,
epa
Note
You cannot install the USB driver if a Memory
Stick is not in your VCR.
Be sure to insert a Memory Stick into your
VCR before installing the USB driver.
peae
Ec ea e caea
Memory Stick, ycaa paepa USB
ye ea.
epe yca paepa USB
ae cae Memory Stick
ea.
Image data cannot be transferred by

the USB connection
He epea ae
pae cee USB

before installation of the USB driver was
completed. Perform the following procedure to
correctly install the USB driver.

cy ep e
eay aepe yca
paepa USB. Be ceyy
peypy pa yca
paepa USB.
Step 1 Uninstall the incorrect USB driver

1 Turn on the power and allow Windows to
load.
2 Connect the USB jack on your computer to
the (USB) jack on your VCR using the USB
cable supplied with your VCR.
3 Insert a Memory Stick into your VCR, and
set the POWER switch to ON.
4 Open your computers Device Manager.
Windows 2000 Professional:
Open My Computer t Control Panel
tSystem t Hardware tab, and click
the Device Manager button.
Other OS:
t System, and click Device Manager.
5 Select Other devices.
Select the device prefixed with the (?) mark
and delete.
Ex: (?)Sony Handycam
6 Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and
then disconnect the USB cable.
7 Restart your computer.
Step 2 Install the USB driver on the CD-ROM
Perform the entire procedure listed in Installing
the USB driver on page 151.
y 1 aee epa
paepa USB
1 Be ep ec
apy Windows.
2 Cee e USB a epe c
e (USB) a eae c
ae USB, paae
eay.
3 Bcae Memory Stick
ea ycae
epeae POWER ee ON.
4 Ope a ce epe
ppay ceep ycpc.
ae Windows 2000 Professional:
Ope ay M ep t
ae ypae t Ccea t
ay Opyae ae
y ceep ycpc.
pye OC:
Bepe M ep t ae
ypae t Ccea ae
y cpca.
5 Bepe pye ycpca.
Bepe ycpc c pec (?)
yae e.
Hapep: (?)Sony Handycam
6 cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG), a ae
cee ae USB.
7 epeapye ep.

computer
y 2 caa paepa USB c ca

CD-ROM
c e peypy,
peey paee caa paepa
USB a cp. 151.
153

computer
pcp pae,
epa
Viewing images on Windows
pcp pae Windows
An application such as Windows Media Player

capable of playing back MPEG pictures must be
installed (to play back moving pictures).
ycae pee,
pe e cp
pae MPEG ( cpee
x pae), apep,
Windows Media Player.
(1) Set the USB MODE switch to

(MEMORY STICK).
allow Windows to load.
(3) Connect one end of USB cable to the (USB)
jack on the VCR and the other end to the USB
connector on your computer.
and insert a Memory Stick into your VCR.
USB MODE appears on the screen of the
VCR.
(6) Open My Computer on Windows and
double click the newly recognized drive
(Example: Removable Disk (E:)).
The folders inside the Memory Stick are
displayed.
(7) Select and double-click the desired image file
from the folder.
For the detailed folder and file name, see
Image file storage destinations and image
files (p. 156).
USB connector/
Pae USB

(MEMORY STICK).
ee
caa ya - VCR.
(2) Be ep ec
apy Windows.
(3) cee e ae USB
ey (USB) a eae, a
py - paey USB a epe.
(4) cee cee aaep
epee a eay
cae Memory Stick
ea.
(5) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
Ha pae eaa c
a USB MODE.
(6) Ope M ep
Windows a ae a ce
apye c (apep:
Removable Disk (E:)).
Opac a a Memory Stick.
(7) B ae epe a ae a
a y pae.
pe cae a e
aa c. paee Meca xpae
a pae a
pae (cp. 156).
(USB) jack/
e (USB)

ae USB
Push into the end/
(paaec)
Hae ypa
154
pcp pae,
epa

computer
Desired file type/
Hy aa
Double-click in this order/

ceaec x aa
Still image/
Hee paee
Dcim folder t 100msdcf folder t Image file/

aa Dcim t aa 100msdcf t a pae
Moving picture*/
e paee*
Mssony folder t Moml0001 folder t Image file*/

aa Mssony t aa Moml0001 t a pae*
* epe pcp peeyec
cpa a a ec c
epa. B cyae cpee
ecpece c Memory Stick
paee y y
cpc c papa.
Notes
Close the application before you do the
following operation:
Disconnect the USB cable.
Turn on/off your VCR.
Change the setting of the USB MODE switch.
When you view images recorded on "Memory
Stick"s on your computer connected with your
VCR using the USB cable (supplied):
You cannot operate the function using a
cassette.
You cannot insert or eject a cassette.
Keep the cassette compartment closed.
pea
ape pee epe ee
ceyx ec:
Oceee ae USB.
Bee/ee
eaa.
eee e epeae
USB MODE.
p pcpe pae, acax a
Memory Stick, a epe, p
e eay c
paae ae USB:
ye e ypa p
ca acce.
He ca e
accey.
He pae acce ce.
Unplug the USB cable or eject the

Memory Stick
For Windows 2000 Professional/
Me/ Windows XP users
To unplug the USB cable or eject the Memory
Stick, follow the procedure below.
(1) Move the cursor to the Unplug or Eject
Hardware icon on the Task Tray and click to
cancel the applicable drive.
(2) A message to remove the device from the
system appears, then unplug the USB cable
or eject the Memory Stick.
Ocee ae USB
ee Memory Stick
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your

computer before viewing it is recommended. If
you play back the file directly from the
Memory Stick, the image and sound may
break off.
aee Windows 2000

Professional/Me/Windows XP
cee ae USB
ee Memory Stick ceye
eca peype.
(1) epeece ypcp a a Unplug or
Eject Hardware a ae aa
ae ey y e
cecye ycpca.
(2) c cee yae
ycpca cce, ce e
cee ae USB ee
Memory Stick.
155
pcp pae,
epa

computer
Image file storage destinations
and image files
Image files are grouped in folders by file storage
format.
The meanings of the file names are as follows.
ssss stands for any number within the range
from 0001 to 9999.
For Windows Me users

(The drive recognizing the camera is
[E:].)
Meca xpae a
pae a
pae
a pae pypyc a
cec c pa xpae a.
ea a pacpac
cey pa. ssss aae e
c aae 0001 9999.
aee Windows Me
(cpc eaep ae
a c [E:].)
Folder containing still image data/

aa, cepaa ae ex
pae
Folder containing moving picture data/
aa, cepaa ae x
pae
156
Folder/aa
File/a
Meaning/aee
100msdcf
DSC0ssss.JPG
Still image file/a e pae
Moml0001
MOV0ssss.MPG
Moving picture file/a pae

computer
For Macintosh users
Recommended Macintosh environment
OS: Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0/9.1/9.2 or Mac OS X
(v10.0/v10.1) standard installation is required.
However, note that the update to Mac OS 9.0/9.1
should be used for the following models.
iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation
and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive
iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6
standard installation
The USB connector must be provided as
standard.

driver is contained together with CD-ROM
which is supplied with your VCR.
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)
users
The USB driver needs not be installed. Your Mac
is automatically recognized as a driver just by
connecting your Mac using the USB cable.
(MEMORY
Set the USB MODE switch to
STICK). (The default setting is VCR.)
For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users
allow the Mac OS to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM
drive of your computer.
The application software screen appears.
(3) Double click the Setup menu icon.
The menu appears.
aee Macintosh
Peeyea cpea Macintosh
OC: Tpeyec caapa ycaa Mac
OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0/9.1/9.2 Mac OS X.
(v10.0/v10.1)
Oa peyec yca ee
epc Mac OS 9.0/9.1 ceyx
ee.
iMac c caap yca Mac OS 8.6
aee CD-ROM c ee
apy
iBook Power Mac G4 c caap
yca Mac OS 8.6
Pae USB e x caapy
ea.
caa paepa USB

epe ceee eaa
epy ycae a epe
paep USB. paep USB cepc a
ce CD-ROM, paae
eay.
aee Mac OS 9.1/9.2/
Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)
caa paepa USB e peyec.
ep Mac aaec pacaec
a paep cpay ce e
epa Mac c ae USB.
cae epeae USB MODE
ee
(MEMORY STICK).
(caa ya - VCR.)
pcp pae,
epa
aee Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0

(1) Be ep ec
apy Mac OS.
(2) cae paae c CD-ROM
c CD-ROM epa.
c pa pa
ppa ecee.
(3) a ae a a Setup menu.
c e.
157
158

computer
pcp pae,
epa
(4) Click USB Driver to open the folder

containing the six files related to Driver.
(4) Hae y USB Driver,

p ay, p cepac
ec a, cec ppae
Driver.
(5) Select all six files, and drag and drop them
into the System folder.
Then click OK after the message appears.
(6) Restart your computer.
(5) Bepe ce ec a
epeae x ccey ay.
ae, a c cee,
ae y OK.
(6) epeapye ep.
pcp pae,
epa
Viewing images on Macintosh
pcp pae Macintosh
QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed (to

play back moving pictures).
(1) Set the USB MODE switch to
(MEMORY STICK).
allow Mac OS to load.
and insert a Memory Stick into your VCR.
(5) Connect one end of USB cable to the (USB)
jack on your VCR and the other end to the
USB connector on your computer.
USB MODE appears on the screen of the
VCR.
(6) Double click the newly recognized icon on
the desktop.
The folders inside the Memory Stick are
displayed.
(7) Select and double-click the desired image file
from the folder.
For the detailed folder and file name, see
Image file storage destinations and image
files (p. 156).
Hex yca QuickTime 3.0

ee e epc ( cpee
x pae).
(MEMORY STICK).
ee
caa ya - VCR.
(2) Be ep ec
apy Mac OS.
(3) cee cee aaep
epee a eay, a
ae eppee, cae
Memory Stick ea.
(4) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(5) cee e ae USB
ey (USB) a eae, a
py - paey USB a epe.
Ha pae eaa c
a USB MODE.
(6) a ae a cee
apye ae a pae ce.
Opac a a Memory Stick.
(7) B ae epe a ae a
a y pae.
pe cae a e
aa c. paee Meca xpae
a pae a
pae (cp. 156).
USB connector/
Pae USB
(USB) jack/
e (USB)

computer
Macintosh

ae USB
(paaec)
Push into the end/

Hae ypa
159
pcp pae,
epa

computer
Desired file type/
Hy aa
Double-click in this order/

ceaec x aa
Still image/
Hee paee
Dcim folder t 100msdcf folder t Image file/

aa Dcim t aa 100msdcf t a pae
Moving picture*/
e paee*
Mssony folder t Moml0001 folder t Image file*/

aa Mssony t aa Moml0001 t a pae*
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your

computer before viewing it is recommended. If
you play back the file directly from the
Memory Stick, the image and sound may
break off.
* epe pcp peeyec

cpa a a ec c
epa. B cyae cpee
ecpece c Memory Stick
paee y y
cpc c papa.
Note
Close the application before you do the following
operation:
Disconnect the USB cable.
Turn on/off your VCR.
Change the setting of the USB MODE switch.
peae
ape pee epe ee
ceyx ec:
Oceee ae USB.
Bee/ee
eaa.
eee e epeae
USB MODE.
Unplug the USB cable or eject the

Memory Stick
Ocee ae USB
ee Memory Stick
To unplug the USB cable or eject the Memory

Stick, follow the procedure below.
cee ae USB
ee Memory Stick ceye
eca peype.
(1) Quit application programs opened.

Make sure that the access lamp of the hard
disk is not lit.
(2) Drag and drop the Memory Stick icon to
the Trash or select Eject under the Special
menu.
(3) Unplug the USB cable or eject the Memory
Stick.
For Mac OS X (v10.0) users
Unplug the USB cable or eject the Memory
Stick after shutting down your computer.
160
(1) ape pe pae

ppa.
eec, ap pae
ecy cy e p.
(2) epeae a Memory Stick
py epe ay Eject
e Special.
(3) Ocee ae USB ee
Memory Stick.
aee Mac OS X (v10.0)
Ocee ae USB ee
Memory Stick ce e
epa.

computer
Notes on using your computer
Memory Stick
Memory Stick operations on your VCR
cannot be assured if a Memory Stick
formatted on your computer is used on your
VCR, or if the Memory Stick in your VCR
was formatted from your computer when the
USB cable was connected.
Do not compress the data on the Memory
Stick. Compressed files cannot be played back
on your VCR.
Software
Communications with your computer

Communications between your VCR and your
computer may not recover after recovering from
Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.
pea ca
epa
Memory Stick
Paa Memory Stick eae
e e apapaa, ec e
cyec Memory Stick,
papaa a epe,
ec Memory Stick, ycaea
eae, a papaa
c epa p e
aee USB.
He cae ae a Memory Stick.
Cae a e cpc a
Bae eae.
ppae eceee
Paep aa e yeac p
p aa e
pae acc pa
ppa.
p apye pae, ee c
ppa peypa, c
epa a ea
ee pae ecpece
a eae pa pae
ye py, y e c
ap aa , ,
a e yacc p.
C c ep
C ey ea
ep e e ccac ce
xa epa pe Suspend,
Resume Sleep.
Depending on your application software, the

file size may increase when you open a still
image file.
When you load an image modified using
retouching software from your computer to the
VCR or when you directly modify the image on
the VCR, the image format will differ, so a file
error indicator may appear and you may be
unable to open the file.
pcp pae,
epa
161
Copying the image

recorded on Memory
Sticks to tapes
pae pae,
acax a Memory
Stick, a acce
You can copy images recorded on a Memory

Stick and record them to a tape.
M pa pae, acae
a Memory Stick, aca x a accey.
Before operation
Insert a tape for recording into your VCR.
epe aa pa
Bcae accey ac
ea.

(2) Using the video control buttons, search a
point where you want to record the desired
images. Set the tape to playback pause.
simultaneously on your VCR. The tape is set
to the recording pause mode.
image is displayed.
(5) Press MEMORY +/ to select the desired
image. To see the previous image, press
MEMORY . To see the next, press MEMORY
+.
(6) Press X to start recording and press X again
to stop.
z appears on the screen during recording.
(7) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 5 and
6.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) C ypae
epaee ae ec,
ya ex aa ac yx
pae. cae accey
pe ay cpee.
(3) Opee ae y REC
y cpaa ee a
eae. accea ye
ycaea pe ay ac.
c ceee acae
paee.
y pae. pcpa
peye pae ae
y MEMORY . pcpa
ceye pae ae
y MEMORY +.
(6) Hae y X, aa ac.
caa ac ca ae
y X.
B pe ac a pae c
ap z.
(7) Ec ex ae cpa
pye pae, pe y 5
6.
To stop copying in the middle

Press x.
162
PLAY
REC
ca pa, e
ac a
Hae y x.
pae pae, acax

a Memory Stick, a acce
During copying
You cannot operate the following buttons:
MEMORY PLAY
MEMORY INDEX
MEMORY DELETE
MEMORY +/
B pe pa
He ca ceye :
MEMORY PLAY
MEMORY INDEX
MEMORY DELETE
MEMORY +/
Note on the index screen

You cannot record the index screen.
peae ecy pay

ec pa e aca.
Image data modified with your computer or

shot with other equipment
You may not be able to copy them with your
VCR.
ae pae, eee c
epa ce c
py aapayp
B, x e ye cpa c
eaa.
If you press DISPLAY during recording or in

recording standby mode
You can see memory playback and the file name
indicators in addition to the indicators pertinent
to tapes, such as the time code indicator.
Ec aa y DISPLAY pee
ac a ac
pe ap, cxc accea,
apep, apa a pee,
ye ap cpee
a e aa.
Copying the image recorded on

Memory Sticks to tapes
163
eee ex
Enlarging still images
pae, acax a
recorded on Memory
Sticks Memory PB ZOOM Memory Stick PB ZOOM a
You can enlarge still images recorded on a
Memory Stick. You can select and view the
desired part from the enlarged still image. Also
you can copy the desired part of the enlarged still
image to tapes or Memory Sticks.
Before operation
(2) Press PB ZOOM in the memory playback
mode. The center of the image is enlarged to
twice its size, and R r T t appear on the
screen.
R : The image moves downwards.
r : The image moves upwards.
T : The image moves rightwards (Turn
the dial downwards.)
t : The image moves leftwards (Turn the
dial upwards.)
(5) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom
button on the Remote Commander.
You can enlarge the image from 1.1 times up
to 5.0 times its size.
W : Decreases the zoom ratio.
T : Increases the zoom ratio.
164
M ye ee
M pa pcpe yy
ac yee e
pae. pe , pa
yy ac yee e
pae a acce a Memory
Stick.
epe aa pa
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(2) Hae y PB ZOOM pee
cpee a.
ep pae ye yee
e cpae c cx, a
pae c cpe R r T t.
epeee yee pae,
ae ae a c.
R : paee ceaec .
r : paee ceaec epx.
epeee yee pae,
ae ae a c.
T : paee ceaec pa
(epe c .)
t : paee ceaec e
(epe c epx.)
(5) Opeypye pac ee
acaa c ee
acaa a ye ca
ypae.
M ye paee c
e 1,1 5,0 pa.
W : eee pac ee
acaa.
T : eee pac ee
acaa.
Enlarging still images recorded

on Memory Sticks
Memory PB ZOOM
PB ZOOM
eee ex
pae, acax a
Memory Stick PB ZOOM a
PB ZOOM
2.0
[EXEC] :
PB ZOOM
2.0
[EXEC] :
PB ZOOM
5.0
W
[EXEC] :
To cancel the PB ZOOM function
e y PB ZOOM
Press PB ZOOM.
Hae y PB ZOOM.
In the PB ZOOM mode

The digital effect function does not work.
B pee PB ZOOM
y p ea e paae.
The PB ZOOM function is canceled when the

following buttons are pressed:
MENU
MEMORY PLAY
MEMORY INDEX
MEMORY +/
y PB ZOOM eec p aa
ceyx :
MENU
MEMORY PLAY
MEMORY INDEX
MEMORY +/
Moving pictures recorded on Memory Sticks

The PB ZOOM function does not work.
To record an image processed by Memory PB
ZOOM on Memory Sticks
Press PHOTO to record the image processed by
PB ZOOM.
To record on image processed by Memory PB
ZOOM on tapes
Press REC to record the image processed by
Memory PB ZOOM.
e pae, acae a
Memory Stick
y PB ZOOM e paae.
ac pae, paa c
y PB ZOOM a, a
Memory Stick
Hae PHOTO ac pae,
paa c y PB ZOOM.
ac pae, paa c
y PB ZOOM a, a
accey
Hae REC ac pae,
paa c y PB ZOOM
a.
165
Playing back images

in a continuous loop
SLIDE SHOW
Bcpeee pae
epep ceaec
ayy y SLIDE SHOW
You can automatically play back images in

sequence. This function is useful especially when
checking recorded images or during a
presentation.
M aaec cp
pae epep
ceaec. a y ce
ya p pepe acax pae
pe peea.
Before operation
epe aa pa

SLIDE SHOW in
with the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial (p. 110).
(3) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your VCR plays back
the images recorded on a Memory Stick in
sequence.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
, epy c SEL/
SLIDE SHOW
(3) Hae y MEMORY PLAY. Ba
ea cpee
pae, acae a Memory Stick,
epep ceaec.
2
MENU
MEMOR Y S E T
ST I L L QL TY
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW R E A D Y
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
S L I D E S HOW
[ M P L A Y ] : S T A R T [ ME NU ] : E ND
To stop the slide show
ca ecpa ca
Press MENU.
Hae y MENU.
To pause during a slide show

Press MEMORY PLAY.
ay pe ecpa
ca
To start the slide show from a

particular image
aaa ecpa ca c
peee pae
Select the desired image using MEMORY +/

buttons before step 2.
166
PLAY
Hae y MEMORY PLAY.
Bepe ye paee c
MEMORY +/ epe y 2.
Playing back images in a

continuous loop SLIDE SHOW
To view the recorded images on TV
Connect your VCR to a TV with the A/V
connecting cable supplied with your VCR before
operation.
If you change the Memory Stick during
operation
The slide show does not operate. If you change
the Memory Stick, be sure to follow the steps
again from the beginning.
Bcpeee pae
epep ceaec
ayy y SLIDE SHOW
pcpa acax pae a
pae eepa
epe aa pa cee
ea eepy c
cee ae ay/e,
paae eay.
Ec ae Memory Stick pe
pa
y ecpa ca e ye
paa. Ec B aee Memory Stick,
e ce ec c aaa.
167
Preventing accidental
erasure
Image protection
pepaee
cya cpa
aa pae
To prevent accidental erasure of important

images, you can protect selected images.
pepae cya cpa

ax pae pae pae
a.
Before operation
epe aa pa

(2) Play back the image you want to protect.
PROTECT in
with the SEL/PUSH EXEC
dial (p. 110).
(4) Select and decide upon ON with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial.
(5) Press MENU to make the menu display
disappear. The - mark is displayed
beside the data file name of the selected
image.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Bcpee paee, pe
ex a.
, epy c SEL/PUSH
PROTECT
EXEC, ae a c (cp. 115).
(4) Bepe ON, epy c SEL/PUSH
EXEC, ae a c
(5) Hae y MENU, ypa e.
P c aae aa ax pa
pae c a -.
3
4
MEMOR Y S E T
ST I L L QL TY
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
10 / 12
ST I L L QL TY
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
OF F
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URNRE T
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
10 / 12
ST I L L QL TY
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
ON
S L I D E S HOW O F F
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
10 / 12
ST I L L QL TY
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
ON
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MENU
To cancel image protection
e a pae
Select and decide upon OFF with the SEL/PUSH

EXEC dial in step 4.
B ye 4 epe OFF, epy c SEL/

PUSH EXEC, ae a c.
Note
Formatting erases all information on the
Memory Stick, including the protected image
data. Check the contents of the Memory Stick
before formatting.
peae
B pe papa yac ce
ae a Memory Stick, a ae
aex pae. epe
papae pepe cepe
Memory Stick.

is set to LOCK
You cannot carry out image protection.
168
Stick ycae ee LOCK
B e cee ay pae.
Deleting images
aee pae
You can delete images stored in a Memory

Stick. You can delete all images or selected
images.
M ya pae, acae a
Memory Stick. M ya ce
pae pae.
Deleting selected images
aee pax pae

epe aa pa

(2) Play back the image to be deleted.
(3) Press MEMORY DELETE. DELETE?
(4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected
image is deleted.
(1) cae epeae POWER

ee ON.
(2) Bcpee paee, pe
ex ya.
(3) Hae y MEMORY DELETE. Ha
pae c a DELETE?.
(4) Hae y MEMORY DELETE ee pa.
Bpae paee ye yae.
DE L E T E
100 - 0010
DELETE
89 / 100
DELETE?
[ DE L E T E ] : DE L
[ ] : C A NC E L
To cancel deleting an image
e yae pae
Press MEMORY in step 4.
Hae y MEMORY ye 4.
To delete an image displayed on the

index screen
yae pae,
paae a ec pae
Press MEMORY +/ to move the B indicator to

the desired image you want to delete and follow
steps 3 and 4.
Hae y MEMORY +/ epeee

apa B pae, pe
ex ya, e ec
y 3 4.
Before operation
169
Deleting images
aee pae
Notes
To delete a protected image, first cancel image
protection.
Once you delete an image, you cannot restore
it. Check the images to be deleted carefully
before deleting them.
pea
yae ae pae,
caaa ee ay pae.
ce yae pae e e
ye cca. epe yaee
ae pepe pae.

is set to LOCK
You cannot delete images.
Stick ycae ee LOCK
B e cee ya pae.
Deleting all the images

You can delete all unprotected images in a
Memory Stick.
Before operation
DELETE ALL in
with the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial (p. 110).
(3) Select and decide upon OK with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. OK changes to EXECUTE.
(4) Select and decide upon EXECUTE with the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. DELETING flashes on
the screen. When all the unprotected images
are deleted, COMPLETE is displayed.
170
aee cex pae

M ya ce eaee pae
a Memory Stick.
epe aa pa
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
, epy c SEL/PUSH
DELETE ALL
EXEC, ae a c (cp. 115).
(3) Bepe OK, epy c SEL/PUSH
EXEC, ae a c. a OK
cec ae EXECUTE.
(4) Bepe EXECUTE, epy c SEL/
PUSH EXEC, ae a c. Ha pae
ae a ap DELETING. a
ce eaee pae yy
yae, pac a
COMPLETE.
Deleting images
aee pae
MEMOR Y S E T
ST I L L QL TY
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L READY
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
S T I L L QL T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L RE T URN
F ORMA T
OK
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
S T I L L QL T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
F ORMA T
OK
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
S T I L L QL T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
F ORMA T
E X ECU T E
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
S T I L L QL T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
D E L E T E A L L D E L E T I NG
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
S T I L L QL T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
D E L E T E A L L COMP L E T E
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MENU
To cancel deleting all the images in

the Memory Stick
e yae cex
pae a Memory Stick


While DELETING is displayed

Do not set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or
press any buttons.
B e pae a DELETING
He ycaaae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG) e aae ax
.
171

PRINT MARK
ac ea
aa PRINT MARK
You can specify the recorded still image to print

out by writing marks. This function is useful for
printing out still images later.
Your VCR conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print
Order Format) standard for specifying the still
images to be printed out.
B ee yaa acae pae

pacea, e x aa. a
y ec e ceye
pacea ex pae.
a ea yepe
pea caapa DPOF (p
pa pa ea) aae ea
ex pae.
Before operation
(2) Play back the still image you want to write a
print mark on.
PRINT MARK in
with the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial (p. 109).
(4) Select and decide upon ON with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial.
(5) Press MENU to make the menu display
disappear. The print mark
is displayed
beside the data file name of the image.
epe aa pa
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee ON.
(2) Bcpee ee paee,
p ex aca ea
a.
PRINT MARK
, epy c SEL/
(4) Bepe ON, epy c SEL/PUSH
EXEC, ae a c.
(5) Hae y MENU, ypa e.
P c aae aa ax
pae c ea a
.
MEMOR Y S E T
S T I LL Q L T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K O F F
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
10 / 12
S T I L L QL T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K O N
P RO T E C T
OFF
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
10 / 12
S T I L L QL T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K ON
P RO T E C T
OF F
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MEMOR Y S E T
10 / 12
S T I L L QL T Y
MO V I E S E T
P R I N T MA R K ON
P RO T E C T
S L I D E S HOW
P HO T O S A V E
DE L E T E A L L
F ORMA T
RE T URN
[ ME N U ] : E N D
MENU
172
To cancel writing print marks
e ac eax a
Select and decide upon OFF with the SEL/PUSH

EXEC dial in step 4.
B ye 4 epe OFF, epy c SEL/

PUSH EXEC, ae a c.

PRINT MARK
ac ea aa PRINT
MARK

is set to LOCK
You cannot write print marks on still images.
Stick ycae ee LOCK
B e cee aca eae a a
ex paex.
Moving pictures
You cannot write print marks on moving
pictures.
e pae
B e cee aca eae a a
x paex.
While the file name is flashing

You cannot write a print mark on the still image.
a aa ae
B e ee aca ea a a
e pae.
173
Troubleshooting
English
Type of trouble and their solutions

If you run into any problem using your VCR, use the following table to troubleshoot the problem. If
the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or a local authorized
Sony service facility. If C:ss:ss appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display function is
activated. Refer to Self-diagnosis display (p. 180).
In the playback mode

Symptom
You cannot play back.
There are horizontal lines on the

picture or the playback picture is
not clear or does not appear.
No sound or only a low sound is
heard when playing back a tape.
Displaying the recorded date, date

search function does not work.
The title search function does not

work.
Additional sound added to the

recorded tape can not be heard.
The title is not displayed.
174
Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The POWER switch is not set to ON.
c Set it to ON (p. 23).
c Rewind the tape (p. 25).
The video head may be dirty.
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)
(p. 202).
The volume is turned to minimum.
c Press VOLUME + (p. 23).
A stereo tape is being played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2 in
the menu settings.
c Set it to STEREO (p. 108).
AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings.
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 95, 108).
The tape has no cassette memory.
c Use a tape with cassette memory (p. 58).
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion (p. 59).
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
There are no titles in the tape.
c Superimpose the titles (p. 44).
The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion (p. 57).
AUDIO MIX is set to ST1 side in the menu settings.
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 95, 108).
TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.

In the playback and recording modes
Symptom
The power does not turn on.
Troubleshooting cpaee ecpace

The AC power adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet (wall
socket).
c Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall outlet (wall socket)
(p. 14).
The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).
You cannot record.
The POWER switch is not set to ON.
c Rewind the tape or insert a new one (p. 22, 25).
The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.
c Use a new tape or slide the tab (p. 22).
The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).
c Remove the cassette and leave your VCR for at least one hour
to acclimatize (p. 201).
The battery pack is quickly
The operating temperature is too low.
discharged.
The battery pack is not fully charged.
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16).
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).
The battery remaining indicator
You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold
does not indicate the correct time.
environment for a long time.
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).
The battery is not fully charged.
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).
A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on
the battery remaining indicator is correct (p. 16).
The power goes off although the
A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.
battery remaining indicator
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on
indicates that the battery pack has
the battery remaining indicator is correct (p. 16).
enough power to operate.
The cassette cannot be removed
The power source is disconnected.
from the holder.
c Connect it firmly (p. 14, 15).
The battery is dead.
c Use a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).
175

Symptom
The % and Z indicators flash and
no functions except for cassette
ejection work.
indicator does not appear
when using a tape with cassette
memory.
Remaining tape indicator is not
displayed.
176

Moisture condensation has occurred.
The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty.
c Clean the gold-plated connector (p. 194).
The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator
(p. 111).

When operating using the Memory Stick
Symptom
The Memory Stick does not
function.
Recording does not function.
The image cannot be deleted.
Deletion of all the images cannot be

carried out.
You cannot protect an image.
You cannot write a print mark on a

still image.
The photo save function does not

work.
You cannot play back images in
actual size.
You cannot format the Memory

Stick.

The Memory Stick is not inserted.
c Insert a Memory Stick (p. 121).
The Memory Stick has already been recorded to its full
capacity.
c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 169).
The Memory Stick formatted incorrectly is inserted.
c Format the Memory Stick or use another Memory Stick
(p. 110, 121).
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 119).
The image is protected.
c Cancel image protection (p. 168).
The image to protect is not be played back.
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image (p. 142).
The image to write a print mark is not be played back.
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image (p. 142).
You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.
c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture.
You may not be able to play back images in actual size when
you try to play back images recorded on other equipment. This
is not a malfunction.
177

Others
Symptom
The title is not recorded.
The cassette label is not recorded.
Digital program editing to a tape

does not function.
Digital program editing to a

Memory Stick does not function.
The Remote Commander does not
work.
178

c Erase unnecessary titles (p. 48).
The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible
(p. 22).
The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion.
c Superimpose the title to the recorded position (p. 46).
c Erase unnecessary data (p. 48).
The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible
(p. 22).
The input selector on the other VCR is not set correctly.
c Check the connection and set the input selector on the other
VCR again (p. 67, 69).
The VCR is connected to DV equipment other than Sonys
using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).
c Set it to IR (p. 73).
Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is attempted.
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 85).
Your VCR and the other VCR are not synchronized.
c Adjust the synchronisation (p. 81).
The IR SETUP code is incorrect.
c Set the correct code (p. 75, 76).
Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is attempted.
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 137).
The remote control code is not set correctly or set to OFF.
c Set COMMANDER in the menu settings (p. 112).
Something is blocking the infrared rays.
c Remove the obstacle.
The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the +
polarities incorrectly matching the + marks.
c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity (p. 216).
The batteries are dead.
c Insert new ones (p. 216).

Symptom
The melody or beep sounds for
five seconds.
While editing using the i.LINK

cable (DV connecting cable), the
picture cannot be monitored.
No function works even though the
power is on.
You cannot charge the battery pack.

While charging the battery pack, the
POWER ON/CHARGE lamp
flashes.
Image data cannot be recognized

with the USB connection.
The cassette cannot be removed

even if the cassette lid is open.
Disconnect the power cord (mains lead) of the AC power

adaptor or remove the battery, then reconnect it after about one
minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work,
press the RESET button on the backside of your (recording)
VCR using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the RESET
button, all the settings including the date and time return to the
default.)
Charge is completed.
The battery pack is not properly installed.
c Install it properly (p. 15).
The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).
c Set it to OFF (CHG) (p. 16).
The battery pack is not properly installed.
c Install it properly (p. 15).
Something is wrong with the battery pack.
c Please contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility.
The USB cable was connected before installation of the USB
driver was completed.
c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and re-install the USB
driver (p. 98, 151).
The setting of USB MODE switch is not correct.
c Set USB MODE switch correctly (p. 99, 152).
Moisture has started to condense in your VCR (p. 201).
While charging the battery pack, the

POWER ON/CHARGE lamp does
not light up.

Some troubles have occurred in your VCR.
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your
VCR.
Remove the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and connect it
again (p. 69).
179
English
Self-diagnosis display
Your VCR has a self-diagnosis display function.
This function displays the current condition of
your VCR as a 5-digit code (a combination of
letters and figures) on the screen.
If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following
code chart. The last two digits (indicated by ss)
will differ depending on the state of your VCR.
LCD screen
C:21:00
Self-diagnosis display
C:ss:ss
You can service your VCR yourself.
E:ss:ss
Contact your Sony dealer or a local
authorized Sony service facility.
Five-digit display
C:04:ss
C:21:ss
C:22:ss
C:31:ss
C:32:ss
E:61:ss
E:62:ss

You are using a battery pack that is not an InfoLITHIUM
battery pack.
c Use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack (p. 18, 195).
The video heads are dirty.
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)
(p. 202).
A malfunction, other than the above, that you can service has
occurred.
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your
VCR.
c Disconnect the power cord (mains lead) of the AC power
adaptor or remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the
power source, operate your VCR.
A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.
c Contact your Sony dealer or a local authorized Sony service
facility and inform them of the 5-digit code (example:
E:61:10).
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your
Sony dealer or a local authorized Sony service facility.
180
English
Warning indicators and messages

If the indicators on the screen flash, check the following: See the page in parentheses ( ) for more
information.
: You can hear the beep sound when BEEP is set to MELODY/NORMAL in the menu settings.
: The POWER ON/CHARGE lamp flashes green.
3
3min
TAPE END
Slow flashing
Fast flashing
6
NO TAPE
9
C:21:00
COPY
INHIBIT
CLEANING
CASSETTE
q;
qa
C:31:00
NO
MEMORYSTICK
CLOCK SET
1 The battery is weak or dead.

Slow flashing: The battery is weak.
Fast flashing: The battery is empty or dead (p. 16).
Depending on conditions, the E indicator may flash, even if there are 5 to 10 minutes remaining.
2 The tape is near the end. (In Record)
The flashing is slow.
3 The tape has run out.
The flashing becomes fast.
When you press the REC button, these indications appear.
4 The clock is not set.
When this message appears even though you set the date and time, the vanadium-lithium battery is
discharged. Charge the vanadium-lithium battery (p. 203).
181
Warning indicators and messages

5 No tape has been inserted.
When you press the REC button, this indication appears.
6 The write protect tab on the tape is set (red).
When you press the REC button, these indications appear.
7 You cannot dub the recordings.
You tried to record a picture that has a copyright control signal (p. 193).
8 The video heads may be contaminated (p. 202).
9 Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 201).
Eject the cassette, turn off your VCR, and leave if for one hour with the cassette compartment open.
q; Some other trouble has occurred.
Disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or a local authorized facility.
qa No Memory Stick has been inserted.
Warning messages
E
This battery is weak or dead. Change the battery.
FOR InfoLITHIUM
BATTERY ONLY
Use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack (p. 18).
16BIT
AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT (p. 111).* You cannot dub new sound.
REC MODE
REC MODE is set to LP (p. 111).* You cannot dub new sound.
TAPE
There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot dub new

sound.
i.LINK CABLE
i.LINK cable is connected (p. 94).* You cannot dub new sound.
Insert a cassette tape with memory.
FULL
The tape cassette memory is full.*

Check the Memory Stick.
FULL
The Memory Stick is full.*
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK

(p. 119).*
NO FILE
No still image is recorded on the Memory Stick (p. 143).*

The Memory Stick data is corrupted (p. 121).*
MEMORY STICK ERROR
FORMAT ERROR
The Memory Stick is not recognized. Check the format (p. 110).*
- DIRECTORY ERROR
There are more than two same directories (p. 143).*
DELETING
You have pressed PHOTO during deleting all images on Memory

Stick.*
FORMATTING
You have pressed PHOTO during formatting a Memory Stick.*
* You hear the melody or beep sound.

** The x indicator and
CLEANING CASSETTE message appear one after another on the screen.
182
cpaee ecpace
T ecpace ep x ycpae
Ec a aepe p ca eaa, cyec
ceye ae ca ycpae ecpace. Ec pea e ycpaec,
ceye ce c a pac cepc ep Sony ece
yee pepe cya e Sony. Ec a pae ac a
C:ss:ss, aae, cpaaa y ce caac. C. pae a
caac (cp. 189).
B pee cpee
Ba ecpac
Bepa pa / e ycpae
epeae POWER e ycae ee ON.
c cae e ee ON (cp. 23).
aac ea.
c epeae ey a aa (cp. 25).
Ha pae pcycy
pae c,
cpe paee
eee e paaec a
pae.
B, apea ea.
c ce c ce acce
(ppeaec e) (cp. 202)
p cpee acce e
ya, ce x y.
caea aa pc.
c Hae y VOLUME + (cp. 23).
Bcpc cepeaccea, a ycaax e
HiFi SOUND pa aee 2.
c cae aee STEREO (cp. 113).
aa AUDIO MIX ycaea ee ST2
ycaax e.
c Opeypye AUDIO MIX (cp. 95, 113).
aa ac paaec,
y ca a e paae.
accea e ee acce a.
c cye accey c acce a (cp. 58).
aa CM SEARCH ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
c cae ee ee ON (cp. 115).
Ha accee eec eaca yac ey
aca ac (cp. 59).
He paae y ca p.
accea e ee acce a.
aa CM SEARCH ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
Ha accee cycy p.
c Hae p (cp. 44).
aca ac (cp. 57).
He ce e y,
ae a acay ey.
aa AUDIO MIX ycaea ee ST1

ycaax e.
c Opeypye AUDIO MIX (cp. 95, 113).
He paaec p.
aa TITLE DSPL ycaea ee OFF

ycaax e.
Bcpeee e paae.
(pee a ceye cpae)
183
T ecpace ep x ycpae
B pee cpee ac
Ba ecpac
184
Bepa pa / e ycpae
He aec ae.
Aaep epee a e cee ce.

c cee cee aaep epee a ce (cp. 14).
He ycae aape , pape
pape.
c cae ape aape (cp. 15, 16).
He yaec ac.
epeae POWER e ycae ee ON.

c cae e ee ON (cp. 19).
aac ea.
c epeae ey a aa cae y accey
(cp. 22, 25).
eec a ac ycae a, a paca ea.
c cye y accey epee eec (cp. 22).
ea pa apaay (eca a).
c ee accey cae Ba ea
pep a ac aaa (cp. 201).
aape cp
papaec.
C a eepaypa pyae cpe.

aape ape e c.
c Ca c ape aape (cp. 16).
aape c pape e e
epeape.
c aee e a aape (cp. 15).
ap caec pee
pa aape a
epa paae pe.
aape ee pe cac p e
c eepaype pyae cpe.
aape c pape e e
epeape.
c aee e a aape (cp. 15).
aape ape e c.
c cae ape aape (cp. 15, 16).
p ee caec pee pa
aape a.
c Ca c ape aape ,
ap pa aa caeec pe pa
aape a (cp. 16).
ae aec, x
ap caec pee
pa aape a
aae, e cac
ca ap e
ypa.
p ee caec pee pa
aape a.
c Ca c ape aape ,
ap pa aa caeec pe pa
aape a (cp. 16).
accea e aec
epae.
Ocee c a.
c cee e (cp. 14, 15).
aape c papea.
c cye ape aape (cp. 15, 16).
T ecpace ep x ycpae
Ba ecpac
Bepa pa / e ycpae
Ma ap % Z,
ae y, pe ee
acce, e paa.
pa eca a.
p ca acce c
acce a ap
e paaec.
e pae acce ape ae.

c ce e pae (cp. 194).
He paaec ap
caec e.
aa q REMAIN ycaea ee AUTO

ycaax e.
c cae ee ee ON, cea paac
ap caec e (cp. 116).
185
T ecpace ep x ycpae
p ca Memory Stick
Ba ecpac
186
Bepa pa / e ycpae
He ypye Memory Stick.
He caea Memory Stick.

c Bcae Memory Stick (cp. 121).
He ypye ac.
Memory Stick c aea.

c ae eye pae ae ca (cp. 169).
Bcaea Memory Stick epa papaa.
c Opapye y Memory Stick cye pyy
Memory Stick (cp. 115, 121).
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.
c Oe ay (cp. 119).
He yaec paee.
paee ae.
c Oee ay pae (cp. 168).
ee LOCK.
c Oe ay (cp. 119).
He papa
Memory Stick.

ee LOCK.
c Oe ay (cp. 119).
He yaec yaee
cex pae.

ee LOCK.
c Oe ay (cp. 119).
He yca ay
pae.

ee LOCK.
c Oe ay (cp. 119).
paee, ay p ex yca, e
cpc.
c Hae y MEMORY PLAY cpee
pae (cp. 142).
He acaec ea a a
e pae.

ee LOCK.
c Oe ay (cp. 119).
paee, a pe ex aca ea
a, e cpc.
c Hae y MEMORY PLAY cpee
pae (cp. 142).
B aeec aca ea a a e
paee.
c eae a e acac a e
paee.
He paae y cxpae
a c.

ee LOCK.
c Oe ay (cp. 119).
pae e cpc c
ece paep.
B, pae e yy cpc c
ece paep p e cpee
pae, acax a py pya. Oa
e ec ecpac.
T ecpace ep x ycpae
pee
Ba ecpac
Bepa pa / e ycpae
accea e ee acce a.
accea a epeea.
c Cpe eye p (cp. 48).
Ha accee ea ycaa pepae
cya cpa.
c epee a eec a, e e
pac yac (cp. 22).
aca ac.
c Hae p a aca yac (cp. 46).
He ec appa
acce.
accea e ee acce a.
accea a epeea.
c Cpe eye ae (cp. 48).
Ha accee ea ycaa pepae
cya cpa.
c epee a eec a, e e
pac yac (cp. 22).
He paae y p
aa ppa a accee.
Ceep x caa py eaa

ycae epa.
c pepe ceee ca ycae ceep
x caa py eaa (cp. 67, 69).
Bea cee c ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) aapaype DV e p Sony.
c cae e ee IR (cp. 73).
a yca ppa a eacay ac e.
c cae ppay ee pa a acay ac e
(cp. 85).
Ba py ea e cxppa.
c Opeypye cxpc (cp. 81).
Hepa IR SETUP.
c cae pa (cp. 75, 76).
He paae y p
aa ppa a Memory
Stick.
a yca ppa a eacay ac e.

c cae ppay ee pa a acay ac e
(cp. 137).
y ca ypae
e paae.
Pe ya ca ypae ycae
epa axc e OFF.
c cae COMMANDER ycaax e (cp. 117).
- pecye pxe papacx ye.
c cpae pece.
aape ycae a, yaae pc + a
x e caa c ca + epaee.
c Bcae aape, ca aeay pc
(cp. 216).
aape c pape.
c Bcae e aape (cp. 216).
He acac p.
(pee a ceye cpae)
187
T ecpace ep x ycpae
Ba ecpac
188
Bepa pa / e ycpae
B eee cey y
e yep ca.
pa eca a.
B Bae eae ec ea.
c ee accey cae ee ca, ae cye
ea.
B pe aa c
cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)
paee e ppyec.
Ocee ae i.LINK (cee ae DV)

ca cee e. (cp. 69)
ae p e a e
paae a y.
Ocee p epa aaepa epee

a e aape , ae cyc
pe y yy cee ca. Be
ae. Ec y ce ee e paa, ae y
RESET a ae ae (acae)
eaa, cy p acpe pee.
(Ec B aa y RESET, ce yca, a ay
pe, epyc ae ya.)
B pe ap aape
a ap POWER ON/
CHARGE e apaec.
apa aepea.
aape ycae epa.
c cae e pa (cp. 15).
aape e apaec.
epeae POWER e ycae ee OFF

(CHG).
c cae e ee OFF (CHG) (cp. 16).
B pe ap aape
a ae ap POWER
ON/CHARGE.
aape ycae epa.

c cae e pa (cp. 15).
Hecpac aape a.
c Opaec cepc ep Sony ece
yee pepe cya e
Sony.
ae pae e
pacac p cee USB.
ae USB e aepe yca

paepa USB.
c ae epa paep USB epeycae
paep USB (cp. 98, 151).
Heepa ycaa epeae USB MODE.
c cae epeae USB MODE pae
ee (cp. 99, 152).
accea e aec
epae, ae ec pa
acce cea pa.
B eae aaa ecpac aa

(cp. 201).
a caac
B Bae eae eec y
a caac.
a y paae a pae eyee
cce Bae eaa e 5a a (a y p).
Ec paaec 5-a , ex
pac ceye ae .
cee e p (aee a ss)
yy ac acc cc
eaa.
pa
C:21:00
a caac
C:ss:ss
B ee cyae
eaa cace.
E:ss:ss
Opaec cepc ep Sony
ece yee pepe
cya e Sony.
aa a
Bepa pa / e ycpae
cye aape e ec
InfoLITHIUM.
c cye aape InfoLITHIUM (cp. 18, 195).
C:21:ss
pa eca a.
C:22:ss
ape e.
c ce c ce acce
(ppeaec e) (cp. 202).
C:31:ss
pa eaa, aac peex e,

py B ee ycpa cace.
c ee accey cae ee ca, ae e
ea.
c Ocee p aaepa epee a
epce ee aape . Ca
cee c a, ae e
ea.
C:32:ss
E:61:ss
E:62:ss
C:04:ss
pa ecpac, py e ycpa
cace.
c Opaec cepc ep Sony ece
yee pepe cya e
Sony ce 5-a (apep: E:61:10).
Ec B e ee cace ycpa eay ae ce ecx

ca cecyx e ycpae, paec cepc ep Sony
ece yee pepe cya e Sony.
189
peypeae ap ce
Ec a pae a ap, pepe ceyee: C. cpay pyx cax
( ) ye ee p pa.
: Ce y ca, ec apaep BEEP e ycae a MELODY/NORMAL.
: aa POWER ON/CHARGE ae ee e.
3
3min
TAPE END
cpe
ae
Meee
ae
CLOCK SET
NO TAPE
9
C:21:00
COPY
INHIBIT
CLEANING
CASSETTE
q;
qa
C:31:00
NO
MEMORYSTICK
1 aape c papea.
Meee ae: aape papea.
cpe ae: aape e apea c papea (cp. 16).
B acc yc e a ap E, ae ec ee cac apa a 5-10
y.
2 ea ca a. (B pee ac)
Mae eee.
3 aac ea.
Mae cac cp.
p aa REC ec a a.
4 ac e acpe.
Ec cee paaec, ae ec ycae aa pe, a aaeea aapea papac. ape aae-ey aapey (cp. 203).
190
peypeae ap ce
5 He caea accea.
p aa REC ec a a.
6 eec a ac ycae (pac).
p aa REC ec a a.
7 He ec epeac.
B aeec aca paee, cepaee ca apc paa (cp. 193).
8 B, ape e (cp. 202).
9 pa eca a (cp. 201).
ee accey, e ea cae e a 1 ac c p ce
acce.
q; B ae- pye ea.
Ocee c a paec cepc ep Sony ece
yee pepe.
peypeae ce
E
aape c pape. aee

aape .
FOR InfoLITHIUM
BATTERY ONLY
cye aape InfoLITHIUM (cp. 18).
16BIT
AUDIO MODE ycae ee 16BIT (cp. 116).* H

y e epeaca.
REC MODE
REC MODE ycae ee LP (cp. 116).* H y

e epeaca.
TAPE
Ha accee e aca yaca.* H y e

epeaca.
i.LINK CABLE
e ae i.LINK (cp. 94).* H y e

epeaca.
qa He caea Memory Stick.
Bcae accey c acce a.

FULL
accea a acce epeea.*

pepe Memory Stick.
FULL
Memory Stick epeea.*
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae ee

LOCK (cp. 119).*
NO FILE
Ha Memory Stick e acax ex pae (cp.

143).*
MEMORY STICK ERROR
ae a Memory Stick pee (cp. 121).*
FORMAT ERROR
He pacaec Memory Stick. pepe pa (cp. 115).*
- DIRECTORY ERROR
DELETING
Cyecye ee yx ax aa (cp. 143).*

B pecce yae cex pae c Memory Stick a
aaa a PHOTO.*
FORMATTING
B pecce papa Memory Stick a aaa a

PHOTO.*
* ye ce e yep ca.
** Ha pae epee c ap x cee
CLEANING CASSETTE.
191
Additional Information
ea pa
Usable cassettes
cyee acce
Selecting cassette types
Bp a acce
You can use the

mini DV cassette only*.
Hi8,
You cannot use any other 8 mm,
Digital8,
VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHS,
S-VHSC, Betamax or
DV cassette.
M ca acce DV c
*. He ca e
pye acce a
8 ,
Hi8, Digital8,
VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHS,
S-VHSC,
Betamax
DV.
* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: those

with cassette memory and those without
cassette memory. Tapes with cassette memory
have
(Cassette Memory) mark.
We recommend that you use tapes with cassette
memory.
* Cyecye a a acce DV: c

acce a e acce a. Ha
acceax c acce a eec ea
(accea a).
Peeyec ca acce c
acce a.
The IC memory is mounted on this type of

cassette. Your VCR can read and write data
such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this
memory.
The functions using the cassette memory
require successive signals recorded on the tape.
If the tape has a blank portion in the beginning
or between the recorded portions, a title may
not be displayed properly or the search
functions may not work properly.
If there is a blank portion or discontinuous
signal on your tape, re-record from the
beginning to the end of the tape concerning
above.
The same result may occur when you record
using a digital video camera recorder without a
cassette memory function on a tape recorded by
one with the cassette memory function.
mark on the cassette
The memory capacity of tapes marked with
is 4Kbit. Your VCR can accommodate
tapes having a memory capacity of up to 16Kbit.
16Kbit tapes are marked
.
This is the mini DV mark.
Ha a e acce ycaea a
e epa cxe. Ba
ea e ca
aca ae, ae a a ac
p .. a ay epay
cxey.
y, cye accey a,
pey ceaee ca,
acae a ey. Ec a ee eec
eaca yac aae ey
aca ac, p e e
pae aea pa e
y ca y paa epa.
Ec a Bae ee eec eaca
yac pepac ca,
e epeac c aaa a
a yaca.
Ta e peya e yc p
e ac c p
eaep e y acce a
a ey, acay e-y c
y acce a.
Mea
a accee
Ec a acce c e
paa
4 Ba ea e paa c
accea c ec a 16 . Ha
acceax c a 16 eec ea
.
This is the Cassette Memory mark.

These are trademarks.
ea DV.
ea acce a.
pe ap.
192
Usable cassettes
When you play back
(GV-D1000E only)
Playing back an NTSC-recorded tape
You can play back tapes recorded in the NTSC
video system on the screen, if the tape is
recorded in the SP mode.
Copyright signal
When you play back
Using any other VCR, you cannot record on a
tape that has recorded a copyright control signals
for copyright protection of software which is
played back on your VCR.
When you record
Audio mode
12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded
in stereo 1, and the additional audio in stereo 2,
at 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and
stereo 2 can be adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX
in the menu settings during playback. Both
sounds can be played back.
16-bit mode: additional audio cannot be
recorded, but the original sound can be recorded
in high quality. Moreover, it can also play back
sound recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit
mode, 16BIT appears on the screen.
p cpee (
e GV-D1000E)
Bcpeee acce, aca
ccee NTSC
Ec accea acaa pee SP, a pae
cp acce, acae
eccee NTSC.
Ca apc paa
p cpee
cy py ea, B
e cee ac a accey, a
p aca ca apc paa
a apcx pa ppa,
cpx a Bae eae.
p ac
Ha eae e
ac ppa, pa cep ca
apc paa a apcx pa
ppa.
p e ac a ppa a pae
c a COPY INHIBIT.
B pe ac ea e
acae ca apc paa a
accey.
Aype
12- pe: epaa y e
aca a cepeec aa 1, a
e y - a cepeec
aa 2 pee 32 . aac ey
cepeec aa 1
cepeec aa 2
peypa ye pa AUDIO MIX
ycaax e pe cpee.
M cp y x aa.
16- pe: He aca
e y, a aca
epaa y c aeca. pe
, cp y, aca
peax 32 , 44,1 48 . p
cpee e, aca 16 pee, a pae c a
16BIT.
Additional Information ea pa
You cannot record software on your VCR that

contains copyright control signals for copyright
protection of software.
COPY INHIBIT appears on the screen if you
try to record such software.
Your VCR does not record copyright control
signals on the tape when it records.
cyee acce
193
Usable cassettes
cyee acce
When you play back a dual

sound track tape
p cpee acce c
y p
When you play back a dual sound track tape

recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi SOUND to
the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 108).
p cpee e c y
p, aca cepeec
ccee, ycae ay HiFi SOUND
y pe ycaax e (cp. 113).
Sound from speaker

HiFi Sound Playing back Playing back a dual
Mode
a stereo tape sound track tape
Main sound and sub
STEREO Stereo
sound
1
Left sound
Main sound
2
Right sound Sub sound
y ppe
You cannot record dual sound programs on your

VCR.
Pe HiFi Bcpeee Bcpeee

Sound
cepeec acce c
acce
y p
Oc
STEREO Cepe
cae y
1
y e Oc y
aaa
2
y pa Bcae y
aaa
Ha eae e
aca ppa c y
p.
Notes on the cassette

When affixing a label on the cassette
Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as
illustrated below [a] so as not to cause
malfunction of your VCR.
After using the cassette

Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the
cassette in its case, and store it in an upright
position.
When the cassette memory function

does not work
Reinsert the cassette. The gold-plated connector
of cassettes may be dirty or dusty.
Cleaning gold-plated connector

If the gold-plated connector on the cassette is
dirty or dusty, the remaining tape indicator is
sometimes not displayed correctly, and you may
not be able to operate functions using cassette
memory. Clean up the gold-plated connector
with cotton-wool swab, about every 10 times
ejection of a cassette. [b]
pea accee
p ppee e a accey
Oae ppee e
ecax, aax a pcye e [a],
e pe epa pae
eaa.
ce ca acce
epeae ey aay, e accey
yp xpae ee epa e.
Ec e paae y acce
a
ee ca cae accey.
e pae acce e
ape ae.
Oca e paea
Ec a e paee a accee
eec p , ap caec
e a paaec epa,
e ca y pa c
acce a. Oae e
pae c xaya aa
pep ce 10 pa ca acce.
[b]
Do not affix a label

around this border./
He ppee
ey
pa.
194
[a]
[b]
About the
InfoLITHIUM battery O aape e
InfoLITHIUM
pack
What is the InfoLITHIUM battery
pack?
pecae c aape
InfoLITHIUM?
The InfoLITHIUM battery pack is a lithium-ion

battery pack that has functions for
communicating information related to operating
conditions between the battery pack and the AC
power adaptor.
The InfoLITHIUM battery pack calculates the
power consumption according to the operating
conditions of your VCR, and displays the
remaining battery time in minutes.
aape InfoLITHIUM - e
aape , aa ye
epea pa ycx cyaa
c aape a a aaep epee
a pa.
aape InfoLITHIUM paccae
peee epep, cx yc
cyaa eaa, paae
caeec pe pa aape a
yax.
Charging the battery pack
epe cae eaa

ae ape aape .
Peeyec apy aape
a p eepaype pyae cpe
10 C 30 C, a e c ap
POWER ON/CHARGE, aae,
aape ape c. p
ape aape a p eepaype,
xe a pee yaa epaa,
Ba, , e yacc ap
aape aea pa.
aepe ap cee cee
aaep epee a ea DC IN a
eae ce aape .
Effective use of the battery pack

Battery pack performance decreases in lowtemperature surroundings. So, the time that the
battery pack can be used becomes shorter. We
recommend the following to use the battery
pack longer:
Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up,
and insert it in your VCR immediately before
you start taking shots.
Use a large capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/
FM90/FM91/QM71/QM91, optional).
Frequently using the LCD panel or frequently
operating playback, fast forward or rewind
wears out the battery pack faster. We
recommend using a large capacity battery pack
(NP-FM70/FM90/FM91/QM71/QM91,
optional).
Be certain to turn off the power switch when
not recording or playing back on your VCR.
Battery power is also consumed when your
VCR is in the standby mode or playback is
paused.
Have spare battery packs handy for two or
three times the expected recording time, and
make trial recordings before taking the actual
recording.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The
battery pack is not water resistant.
ee cae
aape a
ec ec aape a
caec p eepaype pyae
cpe. y pec ca
aape a cac ee.
pe pee pa aape a
peeyec ceyee:
cpe aape , e e
apa cee eay
ecpece epe aa ce.
cye aape ec
(NP-FM70/FM90/FM91/QM71/QM91, p
ppeaec e).
ace cae ae y
cpee, ycpe epe e
epe aa p ee cp
pape aape a. Peeyec
ca aape ec
(NP-FM70/FM90/FM91/QM71/QM91, p
ppeaec e).
Bae epeae a, ec
ea e cyec pee
ac cpee. aape
papaec, ec ea axc
pee a, ycaea aya
cpee.
ee aace aapee ,
eceae pe ac, a-p paa
peaee aee pe ac, epe
aa ace ac e py
ac.
He ycae aa a aape
. aape e ec c.
Be sure to charge the battery pack before you

start using your VCR.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an
ambient temperature of between
10C to 30C (50F to 86F) until the POWER
ON/CHARGE lamp goes off, indicating that
the battery pack is fully charged. If you charge
the battery outside of this temperature range,
you may not be able to efficiently charge the
battery pack.
After charging is completed, either disconnect
the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on
your VCR or remove the battery pack.
apa aape a
195
About the InfoLITHIUM battery

pack
Remaining battery time indicator
If power goes off although the remaining
battery time indicator indicates that the battery
pack has enough power to operate, charge the
battery pack fully again so that the indication
on the remaining battery time indicator is
correct. Note, however, that the correct battery
indication sometimes will not be restored if it is
used in high temperatures for a long time or left
in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is
frequently used. Regard the remaining battery
time indication as the approximate recording
time.
The E mark (indicating there is little
remaining battery time) sometimes flashes
depending on the operating conditions or
ambient temperature and environment, even if
the remaining battery time is about five to ten
minutes.
How to store the battery pack

If the battery pack is not used for a long time,
do following procedure once per year to
maintain proper function:
1. Fully charge the battery.
2. Discharge on your electronic equipment.
3. Remove the battery from the equipment and
store it in a dry, cool place.
To use the battery pack up on your VCR, leave
your VCR in ON mode until the power goes off
without a cassette inserted.
Battery life
The battery life is limited. Battery capacity
drops little by little as you use it more and
more, and as time passes. When the available
battery time is shortened considerably, a
probable cause is that the battery pack has
reached the end of its life. Please buy a new
battery pack.
The battery life varies according to how it is
stored, operating conditions, and environment
for each battery pack.
196
O aape e InfoLITHIUM
ap caec pee
pa aape a
Ec ae aec, x ap
caec pee pa aape
a aae, e cac
ca ap e ypa,
ca c ape aape ,
ap pa aa
caeec pe pa aape a.
Oa ceye e, p
ca aape a eee
e pee p c
eepaype, p e xpae eee
pee c ape
cc p e ac ca
paa a aape a
e e ccac. Ceye
paccapa caeec pe pa
aape a a pee pe
ac.
ae ec caeec pe aape
a ccae -ec y, a E
(yaa a , caeec pe
aape a aaaec) ye
a a. ac yc
cyaa eepayp pyx
yc pyae cpe.
paee aape a
Ec aape e cyec
eee e pee, pa
e ceyy peypy
epa e pa pa:
1. c ape aape .
2. Pape e ye ca a
ep ycpce.
3. Ce aape c ycpca
xpae e cyx pxa ece.
pap aape a c
eaa, e ca accey,
cae ea pee ON
pap aape a.
Cp cy aape a
Cp cy aape a pae.
p a ceye ca c
eee pee ec aape a
ey caec. Ec pe pa
aape a cac ae
pe, ep, cp e cy e
y. ye aape .
Cp cy a aape a
ac yc e xpae, cyaa
pyae cpe.
O aee i.LINK
The DV jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant

DV jack. This section describes the i.LINK
standard and its features.
e DV a a aapae ec i.LINKcec e DV. B a paee

caec caap i.LINK e cec.
What is i.LINK?
ae i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling

digital video, digital audio and other data in two
directions between equipment having the i.LINK
jack, and for controlling other equipment.
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected
by a single i.LINK cable. Possible applications are
operations and data transactions with various
digital AV equipment.
When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment
are connected to this unit in a daisy chain,
operations and data transactions are possible
with not only the equipment that this unit is
connected to but also with other devices via the
directly connected equipment.
Note, however, that the method of operation
sometimes varies according to the characteristics
and specifications of the equipment to be
connected, and that operations and data
transactions are sometimes not possible on some
connected equipment.
i.LINK - p ceae
epec epea p e-
aycaa, a ae pyx ax ey
pyae, e e i.LINK, yx
apaex, a ae ypae py
pyae.
i.LINK-cece pyae
ac c ae i.LINK.
Me cac c pa p
ay-e pyae ypae
epea ax.
a ec i.LINK-cecx
ycpc e ay aapay
ceae cxee pca, ypaee
epeaa ax e
ycpca, py e a
aapa, ae pyx ycpc epe
pyae, ee apy.
Ceye, a, e y, e
ypae a eec cec c
xapaepca cea
e pya. pe ,
ypaee epeaa ax a a
e a epx ex
ycpcax.
Note
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be
connected to this unit by the i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable). When connecting this unit to
i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or
more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the
instruction manual of the equipment to be
connected.
About the Name i.LINK

i.LINK is a more familiar term for the IEEE 1394
data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a
trademark approved by many corporations.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard set by the
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
peae
O, c ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) ay
aapay
ycpc. p e a aapaa
i.LINK-cecy ycpcy, eey
a ee e i.LINK (e DV),
paec cpy cyaa
ae pya.
About i.LINK
O aa i.LINK
i.LINK ec ee a ep
epea ax caapa IEEE 1394,
pee ppae SONY. ae
ec p ap, pa
ppa.
IEEE 1394 - eyap caap,
ycae cy eep
epexe paepe.
197
About i.LINK
i.LINK Baud rate
i.LINKs maximum baud rate varies according to
the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are
defined:
S100 (approx. 100Mbps*)
S200 (approx. 200Mbps)
S400 (approx. 400Mbps)
The baud rate is listed under Specifications in
the instruction manual of each equipment. It is
also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some
equipment.
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which
it is not indicated such as this unit is S100.
When units are connected to equipment having a
different maximum baud rate, the baud rate
sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.
* What is Mbps?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the
amount of data that can be sent or received in
one second. For example, a baud rate of 100Mbps
means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in
one second.
i.LINK functions on this unit

For details on how to dub when this unit is
connected to other video equipment having DV
jacks see page 34 and 69.
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK
(DV) compatible equipment made by SONY (e.g.
VAIO series personal computer) other than video
equipment.
Before connecting this unit to a personal
computer, make sure that application software
supported by this unit is already installed on the
personal computer.
For details on precautions when connecting this
unit, also refer to the instruction manuals for the
equipment to be connected.
Required i.LINK Cable

Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during
DV dubbing).
O aee i.LINK
Cpc epea ax
ae i.LINK
Macaa cpc epea ax
ae i.LINK eec acc
pya. Opeee p acae
cpc epea ax:
S100 (p. 100 M/c*)
S200 (p. 200 M/c)
S400 (p. 400 M/c)
Cpc epea ax yaaec
paee Texece xapaepc
cpy cyaa a
ycpca. Ha epx ycpcax a
yaaec p c e i.LINK.
Macaa cpc epea ax
ycpca, a p a e yaaa,
apep, a aapaa, paa S100.
p e a aapaa
ycpcy, eey pyy acay
cpc epea ax, a cpc a
aec yaa.
* ae M/c?
M/c cecye cy ea ceyy
ey ax, pe pa
epeaa a y ceyy. Hapep,
cpc epea ax, paa 100 M/c,
aae, y ceyy epea
100 ea ax.
y i.LINK a a aapae
ee py pa epeac,
a aapa e pyy
epya, eey ea DV, c.
a cp. 34 69.
pe epya, a aapa ae
a pyy i.LINK-cecy
(DV) pya p SONY (apep,
epcay epy cep VAIO).
epe ee aapaa
epcay epy, pepe,
ycae a epe ppae
eceee, paaee ay aapay.
ee py pa epax
pecpc p e a
aapaa ae a cpyx
cyaa ae pya.
Tpeye ae i.LINK
i.LINK and are trademarks.
cye ae Sony i.LINK 4-a-4-pa
( pe epeac p e).
198
i.LINK
- pe ap.
Using your VCR abroad

You can use your VCR in any country or area
with the AC power adaptor supplied with your
VCR within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
When charging the battery pack, use a
commercially available AC plug adaptor [a], if
necessary, depending on the design of the wall
outlet (wall socket) [b].
AC-L10A/L10B/L10C
[a]
[b]
Your VCR is a PAL system based VCR. If you

want to view the playback picture on your TV, it
must be a PAL system based TV with a AUDIO/
VIDEO input jack.
The following shows TV colour systems used
overseas. (for GV-D1000E)
TV color system of your country or area
NTSC system
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central
America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan,
the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.
PAL system
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Holland,
Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia,
New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal,
Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, Thailand, United Kingdom etc.
PAL-M system
Brazil
PAL-N system
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
SECAM system
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco,
Russia, Ukraine, etc.
cae
eaa a pae
B ee ca ea
cpae ac aap
paaey ey ceey aaepy
epee a, p a
ce c apee 100 240 B
epee a ac 50/60 .
ap aape a cye, p
exc, ec pae aaep
[a] cecye p
ce pe [b].
AC-L10A/L10B/L10C
[a]
[b]
B eae cyec ccea

NTSC. Ec ex pcpe
cpe paee a pae
eepa, e eep,
paa ccee NTSC cae
x ea AUDIO/VIDEO.
He pee cce e
eee, cyee a pye. (
e GV-D1000)
B eae cyec ccea
PAL. Ec ex pcpe
cpe paee a pae
eepa, e eep,
paa ccee PAL cae
x ea AUDIO/VIDEO.
He pee cce e
eee, cyee a pye. (
e GV-D1000E)
Ccea e eee Bae
cpae pee
Ccea NTSC
aace cpa, , aaa,
epaa Aepa, , y,
ap, aa, , pe, Meca,
epy, Cypa, Taa, , CA,
Beecya ..
Your VCR is an NTSC system based VCR. If you

want to view the playback picture on your TV, it
must be a NTSC system based TV with a
AUDIO/VIDEO input jack.
The following shows TV color systems used
overseas. (for GV-D1000)
cae
eaa a pae
Ccea PAL
Acpa, Acp, e, Bepa,
Bep, epa, a, , a,
ca, a, a, ye, Maa,
Ha ea, Hpe, a, pya,
Cayp, Caa Pecya, ,
eca Pecya, eap, e,
Taa ..
Ccea PAL-M
pa
Ccea PAL-N
Apea, apaa, pya
Ccea SECAM
ap, aa, pa, pa, Ma, Pcc,
paa, pa ..
199

Simple setting of clock by time
difference
You can easily set the clock to a local time abroad
by setting the time difference. Select WORLD
TIME in the menu settings. See page 112 for more
information.
200
cae eaa a pae

pca ycaa pa
pee a acax
Haxc a pae, B ee e
yca ac a ece pe ye
yca pa pee. Bepe
ay WORLD TIME ycaax e.
pe cee c. a cp. 117.
Maintenance
information and
precautions
Moisture condensation
If your VCR is brought directly from a cold place
to a warm place, moisture may condense inside
your VCR, on the surface of the tape, or on the
heads. If this occurs, the tape may stick to the
head drum and be damaged, or your VCR may
not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside
your VCR, the beep sounds and the % indicator
flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same
time, a cassette is inserted in your VCR.
If moisture condensation occurs
Note on moisture condensation

Moisture may condense when you bring your
VCR from a cold place into a warm place (or vice
versa) or when you use your VCR in a hot place
as follows:
You bring your VCR from a ski slope into a
place warmed up by a heating device.
You bring your VCR from an air-conditioned
car or room into a hot place outside.
You use your VCR after a squall or a shower.
You use your VCR in a high temperature and
humid place.
How to prevent moisture condensation
When you bring your VCR from a cold place into
a warm place, put your VCR in a plastic bag and
tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air
temperature inside the plastic bag has reached
the surrounding temperature (after about one
hour).
eca a
Ec ea pece x
eca ee eee, yp
eaa, a epxc e
a ax e p eca
a. Ec pe, ea e
py apaay pec,
ea e ce paa
aea pa. Ec yp
eaa pa eca
a, py y ca aae
ap %. Ec pee ae
ap Z, a,
ea caea accea.
Ec pa eca a
He yy paa ae y, pe
ee acce. ee accey,
e ea cae e
pep a ac c p p
acce cea. Bea ca
ca, ec ap % e
ec p p e a.
a, a ae ecpac aa,
ea e e apy
eca. Ec pe, accea
a e ye eac eee 10
cey ce p p acce
cea. Oa e ec ecpac.
He apae py acce cea, a
accea e ye eea.
peae ce eca
a
Baa e paac, ec B pecee
ea x eca ee
( ap), a B cyee
ea ap ece ceyx
cyax:
B pec ea c
ca eee, e paae peae.
B ec ea a
a c y
pae ape ec a ye.
B cyee Ba ea ce
c a epa .
B cyee ea ece c
c eepayp yxa e
ac.
a pepa eca a
Ec ea pece x
eca ee, e e
e ae aee e.
Be ea e
aea, a eepaypa yxa yp
aea ce eepayp pyae
yxa (pe epe ac).
None of the functions except cassette eject will

work. Eject the cassette, turn off your VCR, and
leave it for about one hour with the cassette lid
open. Your VCR can be used again if the %
indicator does not appear when the power is
turned on again.
If moisture starts to condense, your VCR
sometimes cannot detect condensation. If this
happens, the cassette sometimes is not ejected for
10 seconds after the cassette lid is opened. This is
not a malfunction. Do not close the cassette lid
until the cassette is ejected.
pa yxy
a aapa ep
pecpc
201

precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
Maintenance information
Cleaning the video heads
ca e
To ensure normal recording and clear pictures,

clean the video heads regularly. The video head
may be dirty when:
mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback
picture.
playback pictures intermittently freeze.
playback pictures do not appear.
the x indicator and CLEANING
CASSETTE message appear one after another
or the x indicator flashes on the screen during
recording.
ecee pa ac e
pae ceye peyp c
e. Be, ,
ape, ec:
a cp pae c
ex e a.
epec cpc e
ap pae.
paee cycye.
pe ac a pae epe
c ap x cee
CLEANING CASSETTE ae ap x.
If any not the problems below, [a], [b] or [c]

occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with
the cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture
and if the above problem persists, repeat
cleaning.
[a]
p e x pecaex
e pe a [a], [b] [c] ce
e c ce acce
(ppeaec e) eee
10 cey. pepe aec pae ,
ec pey ycpa e yac, pe
cy.
[b]
[c]
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen

becomes blue [c].
Ec e apc ee e,
ec pa cae c [c].
Cleaning the LCD screen
ca paa
If there are fingerprints or dust on the LCD

screen, we recommend using an LCD Cleaning
Kit (optional) to clean the LCD screen.
202
pa yxy a aapa
Ec a pae c ea
ae , peeyec
cac e c
(ppeaec e).

precautions
Charging the built-in
rechargeable battery
Your VCR comes with a built-in rechargeable
battery installed so as to retain the date and time,
etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER
switch. The built-in rechargeable battery is
always charged as long as you are using your
VCR. The battery, however, will become
discharged gradually if you do not use your
VCR. It will be completely discharged in about
four months if you do not use your VCR at all.
Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not
charged, it will not affect the VCR operation. To
retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if
the battery is discharged.
apa cpe
ayyp aape
B Bae eae eec
cpea ayypa aapea, pa
cxpae a ay pe ..
eac e epeae
POWER. Bcpea ayypa aapea
cea apaec, a B cyee
ea. Oa, ec
ea e cyec, aapea
ye cee papac. Ec
ea cepe e cyec,
aapea c papc
pe epe 4 eca. ae ec
cpea ayypa aapea e
apea, a e e a pay
eaa. Ec aapea papea,
cxpae a, pee .. ee
ex ap.
apa cpe ayyp
aape:
cee ea
epec ce c paae
ey cee aaepa epee a
ycae ea c
ape aape cae
ea c e ae
ee, e a 24 aca.
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:

Connect your VCR to the house current (mains)
using the AC power adaptor supplied with your
VCR or install the fully charged battery pack in
your VCR, and leave your VCR with the power
switch turned off for more than 24 hours.
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
203

precautions
Precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
Mep pecpc
VCR operation
Paa eaa
Operate your VCR on a 7.2 V (battery pack) or

an 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).
For DC or AC operation, use the accessories
recommended in these operating instructions.
If any solid object or liquid gets inside the
casing, unplug your VCR and have it checked
by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.
Handle your VCR property, and do not subject
it to mechanical shock.
Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG)
when you are not using your VCR.
Do not operate the VCR with its ventilation
slots covered. Doing so might cause heat to
build up inside.
Keep your VCR away from strong magnetic
fields or mechanical vibration.
Do not touch the LCD screen with your fingers
or a sharp-pointed object.
If your VCR is used in a cold place, a residual
image may appear on the LCD screen. This is
not a malfunction.
While using your VCR, the back of the LCD
screen may heat up. This is not a malfunction.
Bea e paa
ape 7,2 B (aape ) 8,4 B
(cee aaep epee a).
pa eaa ca
c epee a
cye paec, peeyee
ace cpy cyaa.
Ec yp pyca a a-
ep pee c, e
ea epe aee
cyaae pepe e y epa Sony.
Opaaec c ea aypa
e epae e cy exaecy
ec.
Ec ea e cyec,
epee epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG).
He cyapye ea, ec e
ee epc ap. B
cyae e p ee
eepayp yp eaa.
He epae ea
ec cx ax e
exaec pa.
He pacaec pay aa
cp peea.
Ec ea cyec a
xe, a pae e c
cae paee. Oa e
ec ecpac.
B pe cyaa eaa
a cpa paa e
apeac. Oa e ec
ecpac.
On handling tapes
Do not insert anything into the small holes on
the rear of the cassette. These holes are used to
sense the type and thickness of the tape and if
the recording tab is in or out.
Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the
tape.
Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To
remove dust, clean the terminals with a soft
cloth.
Opaee c accea
He cae ae pee aee
epc c ae cp acce.
epc cyc peee a
e, a ae peee
a eeca a ac.
He pae pexpaey py
acce e pacaec ee.
eae aca pee
a. yae ce
a c a.
204

precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
VCR care
x a ea
Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the

power and play back a tape for about three
minutes when your VCR is not to be used for a
long time.
Clean the VCR body with a dry soft cloth, or a
soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild
detergent solution. Do not use any type of
solvent which may damage the finish.
Do not let sand get into your VCR. When you
use your VCR on a sandy beach or in a dusty
place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or
dust may cause your VCR to malfunction, and
sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.
a ea eee
e pee e cyec,
ae accey, a ae epec
ae ae cpeee
acce pep a p y.
ce pyc eaa c
cyx a a, cea
ce ca pacpe e
cpeca. He yec pacpe,
pe y pe pe.
He ycae aa eca
ea. Ec B cyee
ea a eca e
ece, pexpae aapa
eca . ec y ca
p ecpace eaa,
pe a e ycpa.
AC power adaptor
Cee aaep epee a

Ocee aapa epec ce,
ec B e cpaeec e ca
ee pe. e ce
epa e p
epa a y. Ha e e
a ca p.
He cyapye aapa, a pee
yp a, ec aapa ya
pee.
C e cae p epa
e cae a e ee pee.
e pe p pec apy
pae epec .
Hae eaece pee e
cpacac c eaec ac
eep e. Ec cyc,
e p pe aae,
aapa e pee.
Bcea epe ce eaece
a.
He papae aapa.
He epae aapa exaec
ec e pe e.
p ca aapaa, ce
pe ap, epe e ae AMpape eaapayp. AMpape eaapaypa apya
pe AM-caa pay eaapayp.
B pecce cyaa aapa apeaec.
Oa e ec ecpac.
He paeae aapa ecax
peep apx xx
x px
Oe ax
epex pa
Unplug the unit from the wall outlet (wall

socket) when you do not intend to use the unit
for a long time. To disconnect the power cord
(mains lead), pull it out by the plug. Never pull
the power cord (mains lead) itself.
Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or
if the unit has been dropped or damaged.
Do not bend the power cord (mains lead)
forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This can
damage the cord and may cause fire or
electrical shock.
Prevent metallic objects from coming into
contact with the metal parts of the plugs or
jacks. If this happens, a short may occur and the
unit may be damaged.
Always keep metal contacts clean.
Do not disassemble the unit.
Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the
unit.
While the unit is in use, particularly during
charging, keep it away from AM receivers and
video equipment. AM receivers and video
equipment disturb AM reception and video
operation.
The unit becomes warm during use. This is not
a malfunction.
Do not place the unit in locations that are
Extremely hot or cold
Dusty or dirty
Very humid
Vibrating
205

precautions
pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
Battery pack
aape
Use only the specified charger or video

equipment with the charging function.
To prevent an accidental short circuit, do not
allow metal objects to come into contact with
the battery terminals.
Keep the battery pack away from fire.
Never expose the battery pack to temperatures
above 60C (140F), such as in a car parked in
the sun or under direct sunlight.
Keep the battery pack dry.
Do not expose the battery pack to any
mechanical shock.
Do not disassemble nor modify the battery
pack.
Attach the battery pack to the video equipment
securely.
Charging while some capacity remains does not
affect the original battery capacity.
cye yaae ape

ycpc eaapaypy c ye
ap.
pepae cya p
aa e ycae aa
eaecx pee c ca
aape a.
He epe aape .
Ha e epae aape
ec eepayp ce 60C,
apep, e cae e ae,
papa ce ece,
p ce ce.
aape e c
cyx.
He epae aape ec
exaecx yap.
He papae e ee aape
.
Hae ppee aape
eaapaype.
apa e c pape
aape a e e a e
epaay ec.
Notes on dry batteries

To avoid possible damage from battery leakage
or corrosion, observe the following:
Be sure to insert the batteries with the +
polarities matched to the + marks.
Dry batteries are not rechargeable.
Do not use a combination of new and old
batteries.
Do not use different types of batteries.
Current flows from batteries when you are not
using them for a long time.
Do not use leaking batteries.
206
pea cyx aapea

B eae pee
cece ye ypee eeca
aapee pp cae ceyee:
p ycae aapee cee,
yaae pc + a x caa c
ca + .
Cyxe aape e epeapa.
He cye e aape ece c
cap.
He cye aape pa a.
Ec aape ee pe e
cyc, cee papac.
He cye aape, pe e.
English
Specifications
GV-D1000
VCR
System
Input/output
connectors
S video input
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,
75 (ohms), unbalanced
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p,
S video output
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,
Audio/Video input
AV MINIJACK
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms),
unbalanced, sync negative
Audio: 327 mV, input
impedance more than
47 k (kilohms)
Video output
Phono jack, 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms),
LCD screen
Picture
10 cm (4.0 type)
80.6 60.5 mm
(3 1/4 2 1/2 in.)
Total dot number
123 200 (560 220)
General
Power requirements
8.4 V (AC power adaptor)
7.2 V (battery pack)
Average power consumption
During playback using LCD
5.2 W
During playback when you close
the LCD panel
3.5 W
Operating temperature
0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)
Storage temperature
20 C to +60 C
(4 F to +140 F)
Dimensions (Approx.)
148 65 133 mm
(5 7/8 2 5/8 5 1/8 in.)
(w/h/d)
Mass (approx.)
880 g (1 lb 15 oz)
excluding the battery pack and
cassette
Supplied accessories
See page 13.
AC power adaptor
Power requirements
100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Output voltage
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the
operating mode
0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)
Storage temperature
20 C to +60 C
(4 F to +140 F)
Dimensions (approx.)
125 39 62 mm
(5 1 9/16 2 1/2 in.) (w/h/d)
excluding projecting parts
Mass (approx.)
280 g (9.8 oz)
excluding power cord
Design and specifications are
subject to change without notice.
Video recording system

2 rotary heads
Helical scanning system
Audio recording system
Rotary heads, PCM system
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,
stereo 1, stereo 2),
16 bits (Fs 48 kHz, stereo)
Video signal
NTSC color, EIA standards
Usable cassette
Mini DV cassette with the
mark printed
Tape speed
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s
Recording/playback time (using
cassette DVM60)
SP: 1 hour
LP: 1.5 hours
Fastforward/rewind time (using
cassette DVM60)
Approx. 2 min.
Audio output
Phono jack (2) 327 mV, output
impedance less than
1 k (kilohms)
DV jack
4-pin connector
Headphone jack
Stereo minijack ( 3.5 mm)
LANC jack
USB jack
Mini-B
207
Specifications
GV-D1000E
VCR
System
Video recording system

2 rotary heads
Helical scanning system
Audio recording system
Rotary heads, PCM system
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,
stereo 1, stereo 2),
16 bits (Fs 48 kHz, stereo)
Video signal
PAL colour, CCIR standards
Usable cassette
Mini DV cassette with the
mark printed
Tape speed
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s
Recording/playback time (using
cassette DVM60)
SP: 1 hour
LP: 1.5 hours
Fastforward/rewind time (using
cassette DVM60)
Approx. 2 min.
Input/output
connectors
S video input
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75
(ohms), unbalanced
S video output
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75
(ohms), unbalanced
Audio/Video input
AV MINIJACK
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms),
Audio: 327 mV, input impedance
more than 47 k (kilohms)
Video output
Phono jack, 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms),
208
Audio output
Phono jacks (2) 327 mV, output
impedance less than 1 k
(kilohms)
DV jack
4-pin connector: S100
Headphone jack
LANC jack
USB jack
Mini-B
LCD screen
Picture
10 cm (4.0 type)
80.6 60.5 mm (3 1/4 2 1/2 in.)
Total dot number
123 200 (560 220)
General
Power requirements
8.4 V (AC power adaptor)
7.2 V (battery pack)
Average power consumption
During playback using LCD
5.2 W
During playback when you close
the LCD panel
3.5 W
0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)
Storage temperature
20 C to +60 C (4 F to +140 F)
Dimensions (Approx.)
148 65 133 mm
(5 7/8 2 5/8 5 1/8 in.)
(w/h/d)
Mass (approx.)
880 g (1 lb 15 oz)
excluding the battery pack and
cassette
Supplied accessories
See page 13.
AC power adaptor
Power requirements
100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Output voltage
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the
operating mode
0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)
Storage temperature
20 C to +60 C (4 F to +140 F)
Dimensions (approx.)
125 39 62 mm
(5 1 9/16 2 1/2 in.) (w/h/d)
excluding projecting parts
Mass (approx.)
280 g (9.8 oz)
excluding power cord
Design and specifications are
subject to change without notice.
Texece xapaepc
GV-D1000
Bea
Ccea
SP: 1 ac
LP: 1,5 aca

Bpe ycpe epe
epe/aa (p
ca acce
DVM60)
p. 2 .
Bxe/xe pae
Bx S video
4-pe e DIN
Ca pc: 1 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep
Ca ec: 0,286 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep
Bx S video
4-pe e DIN
Ca pc: 1 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep
Ca ec: 0,286 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep
Bx ay/e
AV MINIJACK
Be: 1 Vp-p, 75 (O),
ecep,
cxpea
pa
paee
10 c (4,0 a)
80,6 60,5
Oee ec e
123 200 (560 220)
Oe
ae
8,4 B (cee aaep
epee a)
7,2 B (aape )
Cpe peea
c
p cpee c

5,2 B
p cpee c
ap ae
3,5 B
Paa eepaypa
0 C 40 C
Teepaypa xpae
20 C +60 C
Paep (p.)
148 65 133 (//)
Macca (p.)
880
e aape a
acce
ea
C. cp. 13.
Cee aaep
epee a
ae
100 240 B epee a,
50/60
Bxe apee
DC OUT: 8,4 B, 1,5 A pae
pee
Paa eepaypa
0 C 40 C
Teepaypa xpae
20 C +60 C
Paep (p.)
125 39 62 (//),
e a cyae
ac
Macca (p.)
280
e cee ypa
cpy exece
xapaepc y
ee e
peape
yee.
Ccea eac
2 paaec
Ccea a
exaec paep
Ccea ayac
Bpaaec ,
ccea M
cpea: 12 (c
ac 32 , cepe 1,
cepe 2),
16 (C ac 48 ,
cepe)
Beca
e NTSC, caap EIA
cyee acce
Macce DV c ea
a
Cpc e
SP: p. 18,81 /c
LP: p. 12,56 /c
Bpe ac/
cpee (p
ca acce
DVM60)
Ay: 327 B, e xe
cpee - ee
47 k (O)
Bex
e e
ppae, 1 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep,
cxpea
Ayx
e e
ppae (2) 327 B,
e xe
cpee - eee
1 k (O)
e DV
4-p pae
e x ee
Cepeece e
( 3,5 )
e LANC
Cepeece e
( 2,5 )
e USB
Mini-B
209
Texece xapaepc
GV-D1000E
Bea
Ccea
Ccea eac
2 paaec
Ccea a
exaec paep
Ccea ayac
Bpaaec ,
ccea M
cpea: 12 (c
ac 32 , cepe 1,
cepe 2),
16 (c ac 48 ,
cepe)
Beca
e ca PAL, caap
MP
cyee acce
Macce DV c ea
a
Cpc e
SP: p. 18,81 /c
LP: p. 12,56 /c
Bpe ac/
cpee (p
ca acce
DVM60)
SP: 1 ac
LP: 1,5 aca
Bpe ycpe epe
epe/aa (p
ca acce
DVM60)
p. 2 .
Bxe/xe pae
210
Bx S video
4-pe e DIN
Ca pc: 1 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep
Ca ec: 0,3 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep
Bx S video
4-pe e DIN
Ca pc: 1 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep
Ca ec: 0,3 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep
Bx ay/e
AV MINIJACK
Be: 1 Vp-p, 75 (O),
ecep,
cxpea
Ay: 327 B, e xe
cpee - ee
47 k (O)
Bex
e e
ppae, 1 Vp-p,
75 (O), ecep,
cxpea
Ayx
ea e
ppae (2) 327 B,
e xe
cpee - eee
1 k (O)
e DV
4-p pae: S100
e x ee
Cepeece e
( 3,5 )
e LANC
Cepeece e
( 2,5 )
e USB
Mini-B
pa
paee
10 c (4,0 a)
80,6 60,5
Oee ec e
123 200 (560 220)
Oe
ae
8,4 B (cee aaep
epee a)
7,2 B (aape )
Cpe peea
c
p cpee c

5,2 B
p cpee c
ap ae
3,5 B
Paa eepaypa
0 C 40 C
Teepaypa xpae
20 C +60 C
Paep (p.)
148 65 133 (//)
Macca (p.)
880
e aape a
acce
ea
C. cp. 13.
Cee aaep
epee a
ae
100 240 B epee a,
50/60
Bxe apee
DC OUT: 8,4 B, 1,5 A pae
pee
Paa eepaypa
0 C 40 C
Teepaypa xpae
20 C +60 C
Paep (p.)
125 39 62 (//),
e a cyae
ac
Macca (p.)
280
e cee ypa
cpy exece
xapaepc y
ee e
peape
yee.
Quick Reference
pa cpa
Identifying the parts

and controls
Oaee ace
peyp
VCR
Bea
7
8
3
4
5
9
q;
qa
6
1 a PUSH OPEN v (cp. 19)
2 LCD panel
2 ae
3 USB MODE switch (p. 99, 103, 151, 157)
3 epeae USB MODE (cp. 99, 103,

151, 157)
(USB) jack (p. 98, 103, 151, 152, 157, 158)
5 DC IN jack (p. 14, 16)
4 e
158)
6 Battery mounting surface (p. 15)
5 e DC IN (cp. 14, 16)
7 Terminal cover
6 epxc yca aape (cp. 15)
8 Release knob
9 DV jack (p. 34, 69, 88, 130, 134)
q; Infrared rays emitter (p. 78)
qa
BATT release lever (p. 15)
Note on Release knob

When you release the terminal cover, open the
LCD panel first.
When you attach a TV tuner (optional) to your
VCR, slide up the RELEASE knob and release
the terminal cover. After using a TV tuner,
attach the terminal cover to your VCR.
(GV-D1000 only)
(USB) (cp. 98, 103, 151, 152, 157,
7 pa a
8 a pa
9 e
DV (cp. 34, 69, 88, 130, 134)
q; yae papacx ye (cp. 78)
Quick Reference pa cpa
1 PUSH OPEN v button (p. 19)
qa Pa c aape a
BATT (cp. 15)
pea Release
p p p epaa caaa
pe ae .
p e eay
ee epa (ppeaec
e) ae epx y
RELEASE ce py epaa.
ce ca ee epa,
ppee py epaa
eay.
(T e GV-D1000)
211
Identifying the parts and controls
Oaee ace peyp
qs
ql
qd
w;
wa
ws
wd
wf
qf
qg
qh
wg
qj
qk
wh
qs VOLUME buttons (p. 23)
qs VOLUME (cp. 23)
qd DISPLAY button (p. 23)
qd a DISPLAY (cp. 23)
qf Memory recording operation buttons

PHOTO button (p. 127, 140)
MPEG button (p. 131)
qf ypae ac a
a PHOTO (cp. 127, 140)
a MPEG (cp. 131)
qg c
frame () button (p. 25, 26)
frame (apa) () (cp. 25, 26)
qh y SLOW button (p. 25)
qh a y SLOW (cp. 25)
qj H PLAY button (p. 25)
qj a H PLAY (cp. 25)
qk m REW button (p. 25)

ql MEMORY playback operation buttons
MPEG NX button (p. 147)
MEMORY PLAY button (p. 142)
MEMORY INDEX button (p. 145)
MEMORY DELETE button (p. 169)
MEMORY button (p. 147)
MEMORY + button (p. 147)
qk a m REW (cp. 25)

ql MEMORY ypae
cpeee a
a MPEG NX (cp. 147)
a MEMORY PLAY (cp. 142)
a MEMORY INDEX (cp. 145)
a MEMORY DELETE (cp. 169)
a MEMORY (cp. 147)
a MEMORY + (cp. 147)
w; PB ZOOM button (p. 41, 164)
w; a PB ZOOM (cp. 41, 164)
wa MENU button (p. 19, 107)
wa a MENU (cp. 19, 107)
ws
C frame (+) button (p. 25, 26)
ws a
C frame (apa) (+) (cp. 25, 26)
wd X PAUSE button (p. 25)
wd a X PAUSE (cp. 25)
wf REC buttons (p. 32)
wf REC (cp. 32)
wg M FF button (p. 25)
wg a M FF (ycpea epea
epe) (cp. 25)
wh x STOP button (p. 23)
212
qg a c
wh a x STOP (c) (cp. 23)
Oaee ace peyp
wj
e;
ea
wk
wl
es
wj Cepeppe
wk i (headphones) jack (p. 26)
wk e i (e ee) (cp. 26)
wl S VIDEO IN jack (p. 32, 88, 129, 133)
wl e S VIDEO IN (cp. 32, 88, 129, 133)
e; AUDIO L/R OUT jacks

(p. 30, 67)
e; ea AUDIO L/R OUT (cp. 30, 67)
ea VIDEO OUT jack (p. 30, 67)

es S VIDEO OUT jack (p. 30, 67)
ea e VIDEO OUT (cp. 30, 67)

es e S VIDEO OUT (cp. 30, 67)
wj Stereo speakers
213
Oaee ace peyp
ed
r;
ra
ef
rs
eg
rd
eh
ej
ek
el
rf
rg
rh
ed LCD screen
ed pa
ef EJECT knob (p. 22)
ef a EJECT (cp. 22)
eg Cassette compartment (p. 22)
eg acce ce (cp. 22)
eh Memory Stick access lamp (p. 121)
eh ap pae Memory Stick

(cp. 121)
ej Memory Stick Slot (p. 121)

ek Remote sensor
Aim a Remote Commander (supplied) here
for remote control.
ej e Memory Stick (cp. 121)
el RESET button (bottom) (p. 179)
ek a ca ypae
Hapae a e y ca
ypae (paaec) yae
ypae aapa.
r; LCD BRIGHT buttons (p. 23)
el a RESET (y) (cp. 188)
ra SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 19)
r; LCD BRIGHT (cp. 23)
rs POWER switch (p. 19)
ra c SEL/PUSH EXEC (cp. 19)
rd
LANC jack
LANC stands for Local Application Control
Bus System. The LANC control jack is used
for controlling the tape transport of video
equipment and peripherals connected to it.
This jack has the same function as the jack
indicated as control L or REMOTE.
rf Jack cover (p. 30)

rg AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT jack (p. 32, 88, 93, 129,
133)
rh POWER ON/CHARGE lamp (p. 19)
rs epeae POWER (cp. 19)

rd e LANC
LANC aae ccey aaa ec
ypae. e ypae LANC
cyec p a
ep exa
eaapayp e e
epep ycpca. ae e
ee ay e y, a ea
ypae, aee a L REMOTE.
rf pa e (cp. 30)
rg e AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT (cp. 32, 88, 93,
129, 133)
rh aa POWER ON/CHARGE (cp. 19)
214

Remote Commander
VCR and Remote Commander buttons that share
the same name, also share the same function.
Oaee ace peyp

y ca ypae
, ee ae aea a
eae a ye ca
ypae, e ee y.
8
1
2
3
0
qa
qs
qd
5
6
7
1 a PHOTO (cp. 127, 140)
2 DISPLAY button (p. 64)
2 a DISPLAY (cp. 64)
3 Memory control buttons (p. 142)
3 ypae a (cp. 142)
4 SEARCH MODE button (p. 56, 58, 61)
4 a SEARCH MODE (cp. 56, 58, 61)
5 Video control buttons (p. 25)
5 ypae epaee
(cp. 25)
6 REC button (p. 33, 35, 92)

7 MARK button (p. 83, 135)
8 Transmitter
Point toward the remote sensor to control
your VCR after turning on your VCR.
9 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 43)
q; START/STOP button (p. 131)
qa DATA CODE button (p. 64)
qs Power zoom button (p. 41, 164)
qd ./> buttons (p. 56, 58, 61)
qf AUDIO DUB button (p. 93)
6 a REC (cp. 33, 35, 92)

7 a MARK (cp. 83, 135)
8 epea
ypae ea
apae y a a ca
ypae ce e
eaa.
1 PHOTO button (p. 127, 140)
qf
9 a ZERO SET MEMORY (cp. 43)

q; a START/STOP (cp. 131)
qa a DATA CODE (cp. 64)
qs a ee acaa (cp. 41, 164)
qd ./> (cp. 56, 58, 61)
qf a AUDIO DUB (cp. 93)
215
Oaee ace peyp
To prepare the Remote Commander
ya ca
ypae
Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries by matching the

+ and polarities on the batteries to the +
marks inside the battery compartment.
Notes on the Remote Commander

Point the remote sensor away from strong light
sources such as direct sunlight or overhead
lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander
may not function properly.
Your VCR works in the VTR 2 commander
code. Commander codes 1, 2 and 3 are used to
avoid remote control misoperation between
different units. If you use another Sony VCR in
the VTR 2 commander code, we recommend
changing the commander code or covering the
sensor of the VCR with black paper.
216
Bcae e aape R6 (paepa AA),

cec ca + a aapeax c
aa + yp cea aapee.
pea yy ca
ypae
He apae ca a a
ce c cea, apep pe
cee y a pepa. B
p cyae y ca
ypae e e eca.
Ba ea paae c
cae a VTR 2 ya
ca ypae. ya
ca ypae 1, 2 3
cyc a
eaa pyx
ea p Sony eae
epeaepe ca ya
ypae py ycpca. Ec
cyec py ea p
Sony, e VTR 2 ya
ca ypae, peeyec
e ya ca
ypae ap a
ca ypae
eaa ep ya.

Operation indicators
Oaee ace peyp

Paoe aop
LCD screen
3pa
3
4
123min
SP
STILL
NEG.ART
0:00:00:00
0 0 min
ZERO SET
MEMORY
PHOTO 00
SEARCH
q;
qa
qs
5
6
VOL
DV IN
16BIT
qd
1 Pe ac (cp. 116)
2 Cassette memory (p. 192)
2 accea a (cp. 192)
3 Remaining battery time
3 Ocaeec pe pa aape
4 Picture effect (p. 36)/Digital effect (p. 38)
4 e pae (cp. 36)/p

e (cp. 38)
5 Warning (p. 181)

6 LCD bright (p. 23)/Volume (p. 23)/Data code
(p. 65)
7 Video control mode (p. 25)
8 Tape counter (p. 43)/Time code/
Self-diagnosis display (p. 180)
5 peypeee (cp. 190)

6 pc (cp. 23)/pc (cp. 23)/
ax (cp. 65)
7 Pe ypae epaee
(cp. 25)
9 Remaining tape (p. 64)
8 Ce e (cp. 43)/ pee/

a caac (cp. 189)
0 ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 43, 91)
9 Ocaac ea (cp. 64)
qa Search mode (p. 56, 58, 61)
0 ZERO SET MEMORY (cp. 43, 91)
qs DV IN (p. 35)/A/V t DV (p. 88)
qa Pe ca (cp. 56, 58, 61)
qd Audio mode (p. 111)
qs DV IN (cp. 35)/A/V t DV (cp. 88)
1 Recording mode (p. 111)
qd Aype (cp. 116)
217
218
Oaee ace peyp
About the time code

A time code is recorded on the tape for easy
scene search. Your VCR records the time code
during recording. Press DISPLAY to check the
time code. Hour, minutes, seconds, and frames
appear on the LCD screen or on the TV screen.
0:00:00:00 is recorded at the beginning of the
tape. If there is a blank portion on the tape,
however, 0:00:00:00 is recorded after the blank
portion. You cannot rewrite the time code later.
The time code of your VCR is a drop frame
system. It may skip some frames to adjust the
time code.
pee
Ha accey acaec pee,
cp a y .
Bea acae pee
pe ac. Hae y DISPLAY
pep a pee. Ha pae
eepa c ac, y, cey
ap. B aae acce acaec
0:00:00:00. Oa, ec a accee eec
eaca yac, 0:00:00:00
acaec ce eaca yaca.
Bcec pee e
epeaca. a pee
eae cyec ccea
pyca apa. Oa e pyca
epe ap ppep a
pee.
English
Index
A
AC power adaptor ............... 14, 16

Audio dubbing ........................... 93
AUDIO MIX ............................. 108
AUDIO MODE ......................... 111
A/V connecting cable
........... 30, 32, 67, 88, 93, 129, 133
A/V converting cable
....................... 32, 88, 93, 129, 133
i (Headphone) jack ................ 213

Heads ......................................... 202
HiFi SOUND .............. 27, 108, 194
REC MODE ............................... 111

Remaining battery time
indicator ................................... 64
Remaining tape indicator ......... 64
Remote Commander ............... 215
Remote sensor .......................... 214
RESET ................................ 179, 214
B
Battery pack ................................ 15
BEEP .................................. 112, 181
D, E
F, G
Full charge .................................. 16
Format ............................... 110, 118
L
Labeling a cassette ..................... 52
LANC jack ................................ 214
LUMINANCEKEY .................... 38
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial ............ 214

Self-diagnosis display ............. 180
Signal convert function ............. 88
Slide show ................................. 166
Slow playback ............................ 25
Stereo tape ................................ 194
STILL ........................................... 39
Sub sound ................................. 194
S VIDEO jack
................. 30, 32, 67, 88, 129, 133
T, U
M
Main sound ...............................
Memory PB ZOOM .................
Memory photo playing ...........
Memory Stick .......................
Menu settings ...........................
Moisture condensation ...........
MPEG ........................................
MPEG movie playing ..............
194
164
142
118
107
201
118
147
N
NTSC system ............................ 199
NTSC PB(GV-D1000E only) ... 109
O
Operation indicators ............... 217
P, Q
PAL system ............................... 199
Photo save ................................. 140
Photo scan ................................... 63
Photo search ............................... 61
PICTURE EFFECT ..................... 36
Picture search ............................. 25
Playback ...................................... 23
Playback pause ........................... 25
Playing time ................................ 17
Power sources
(battery pack) .......................... 15
(house current) (the mains) ... 14
Power zoom ........................ 41, 164
Print mark ................................. 172
Tape counter ............................... 43

Tape PB ZOOM .......................... 41
Title ........................................ 44, 49
Title search .................................. 56
TRAIL .......................................... 39
Time code .................................... 64
TV color systems ...................... 199
USB jack .............................. 99, 152
V
Various playback ....................... 25
Video head ................................ 202
pa cpa
Data code ............................ 64, 112

Date search ................................. 58
DC IN jack ............................ 14, 16
DEMO MODE .......................... 111
DIGITAL EFFECT ..................... 38
Digital program editing .... 71, 135
DISPLAY ..................................... 43
Dual sound track tape ............. 194
Dubbing a tape ..................... 67, 71
DV connecting cable
....................... 34, 69, 88, 130, 134
DV jack ............ 34, 69, 88, 130, 134
i.LINK ........................................ 197

Image protection ...................... 168
Image quality mode ................ 122
Image size ................................. 124
Index screen .............................. 145
InfoLITHIUM battery ... 18, 195
Infrared rays emitter ................. 78
JPEG ........................................... 118
Quick Reference
Cassette memory ............... 10, 192

Charging the battery ................. 16
Clock set ...................................... 19
Connection
(viewing on TV) ...................... 30
(dubbing a tape) ............... 67, 71
Connection to your computer
..................................... 88, 96, 150
I, J, K
W, X, Y
Warning indicators .................. 181
Wide mode ................................. 29
WORLD TIME .......................... 112
Write-protect tab ................ 22, 119
Z
Zero set memory .................. 43, 91
219
Aa yaae
A
AUDIO MIX ......................................... 113

AUDIO MODE ..................................... 116
Bea .................................... 202

Bcpeee ................................ 23
Bcpeee a MPEG .... 147
Bcpeee c
a ............................................ 142
Bpe cpee .................... 17
Bcae y ..................... 194
B, C
BEEP .......................................... 117, 190
D, E, F, G
DEMO MODE ..................................... 116
DIGITAL EFFECT ................................. 38
DISPLAY ............................................... 43
H
HiFi SOUND .......................... 27, 113, 194
I
i.LINK .................................................. 197
e i (e ee) ...... 213

e DC IN ................................. 14, 16
e DV ................ 34, 69, 88, 130, 134
e LANC ..................................... 214
e S VIDEO
......................... 30, 32, 67, 88, 129, 133
e USB .................................. 99, 152
.............................................. 202
a ye e ............. 43, 91
aya cpee ..................... 25
epeac acce ..................... 67, 71
ea a .................................. 172
ceee epy
.............................................. 88, 96,150
c a .......................................... 58
c pae ............................ 25
c pa ......................................... 56
a apa .................................. 16
peypeae ap ..... 190
pepaae ae
ay/e ......... 32, 88, 93, 129, 133
y ca
ypae ..................................... 215
a ca
ypae ..................................... 214
ecpa ca .................... 166
c SEL/PUSH EXEC ...................... 214
Pae ap ........................ 217

Pae pe
cpee ............................. 25
Paep pae ........................ 124
Pe aeca pae ........ 122
Pe REC MODE ............................ 116
LUMINANCEKEY ................................. 38
aeee cpeee ........ 25

apa aape a .............. 16
aa pae ....................... 168
yae papacx ye ..... 78

eee acaa ................. 41, 164
ec pa .............................. 145
ap caec pee
pa aape ............................... 64
ap caec e ........... 64
a caac ............ 189
c a
(aape ) ........................... 15
(epeca ce) ...................... 14
Cee aaep epee a

..................................................... 14, 16
Ccea NTSC .................................. 199
Ccea PAL ..................................... 199
Cce e eee ..... 199
Ceee
(pcp a pae eepa) .. 30
(epeac e) .................. 67, 71
Cee ae ay/e
................... 30, 32, 67, 88, 93, 129, 133
Cee ae DV
............................... 34, 69, 88, 130, 134
Cxpaee a
c .................................. 140
Cepeeca ea ................ 194
Ce e .................................... 43
RESET ........................................ 188, 214
accea a ....................... 10, 192

pee ........................................ 64
ax .................................. 64, 117
eca a ........................... 201
Tp ................................................ 44, 49
J, K
JPEG ................................................... 118
Memory Stick ................................... 118

MPEG ................................................. 118
N, O
NTSC PB ( e
GV-D1000E) .................................... 114
P, Q
PB ZOOM a .............................. 164
PICTURE EFFECT ............................... 36
STILL .................................................... 39
T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
ca e ................................ 107
TRAIL .................................................... 39
ea c y
p ........................................ 194
eec a ac ....... 22, 119
Ayepeac ................................ 93
aape ................................ 15
aape
InfoLITHIUM ........................... 18, 195
220Sony Corporation
Printed in Japan
Mappa acce .......................... 52
pa ....................................... 115, 118

c ........................................... 61
capae ............................. 63
y pepaa caa .... 88
y PB ZOOM acce ....... 41
y WORLD TIME ..................... 117
Hacpa ac ................................. 19
p a ppa ... 71, 135
Oc y ................................... 194
ppa pe .................... 29
*307257112*

Sony GVD-1000 User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Sony GVD-1000 User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

3-072-571-12(1)

Congratulations on your purchase of this VCR.

For customers in the U.S.A.

This symbol is intended to alert

For customers in the U.S.A. and

Congratulations on your purchase of this VCR.

pae Bac c ppeee

NOTICE ON THE SUPPLIED AC POWER

For the customers in Europe

For the customers in Germany

Capturing images on your computer

y, cyee acax acce

y, cyee acax Memory Stick

Customizing Your VCR

Memory Stick Operations

Using a Memory Stick

Playing back images in a continuous

Oepa c Memory Stick

pcp pae, acax a

Using this manual

Contents of the recording cannot be

Note on Cassette Memory

cpy ace pyce cc

Cepe aca aepaa

Using this manual

Note on TV color systems

Note on TV colour systems

Ha acceax c acce a eec ea

TV color systems differ from country to country.

Tapes with cassette memory are marked by

Using this manual

Precautions on VCR care

Make sure that the following accessories are

eec, ceye paec

1 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor (1),

1 Cee aaep epee a

7 CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB Driver) (1) (p. 98,

6 aapea paepa R6 (AA) ya

8 21-pin adaptor (1) (p. 31) (European models

7 a-c (paep USB SPVD-008)

Step 1 Preparing the

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

When you use your VCR outdoors

Using with a battery pack

Installing the battery pack

cye aaep/ape ycpc

You VCR operates only with the InfoLITHIUM

Using a car battery

cye aape (ppeaec

To remove the battery pack

BATT, slide the battery pack

After installing the battery pack

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Charging the battery pack

You can charge the battery with your VCR.

(1) Install the battery pack.

(1) cae aape .

After charging the battery pack

Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC

Ocee cee aaep epee a

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Playing time/Bpe cpee

Playing time on LCD screen/

Approximate minutes when you use a fully